Инструкция к фотоаппарату canon g9x

У вас уже есть продукция Canon? Зарегистрируйте свои продукты для доступа к программному обеспечению и обновлениям встроенного ПО, а также подпишитесь на рассылку, чтобы получать персонализированные советы и эксклюзивные предложения

Поддержка

Canon PowerShot G9 X

Загружайте ПО, встроенное ПО и руководства, а также получите доступ к материалам поддержки для вашего продукта серии PowerShot.

Драйверы

Для выполнения подключения некоторых устройств к компьютеру может потребоваться драйвер. На этой вкладке вы найдете соответствующие драйверы для своего устройства или, в случае отсутствия драйверов, описание совместимости устройства с каждой операционной системой.

Полезная информация. Доступ к программному обеспечению, руководствам и другим материалам можно получить с помощью вкладок, расположенных выше.

Операционная система Обнаруженная операционная система

Программное обеспечение

Программное обеспечение загружать необязательно, но оно обеспечивает дополнительные функции и позволяет максимально эффективно пользоваться возможностями устройства. На этой вкладке можно просмотреть и загрузить доступное программное обеспечение для вашего устройства.

Операционная система Обнаруженная операционная система

Программное обеспечение

Программное обеспечение загружать необязательно, но оно обеспечивает дополнительные функции и позволяет максимально эффективно пользоваться возможностями устройства. На этой вкладке можно просмотреть и загрузить доступное программное обеспечение для вашего устройства.

Операционная система Обнаруженная операционная система

Руководства пользователя

Руководства для вашего устройства или программного обеспечения перечислены ниже.

Приложения и функции

На этой вкладке можно посмотреть доступные приложения и функции, совместимые с вашим устройством.

Встроенное ПО

Встроенное ПО — это постоянное программное обеспечение, установленное на устройстве и обеспечивающее его корректную работу. Canon может периодически выпускать обновления для этого встроенного ПО, и если обновление доступно, его можно загрузить ниже.

FAQs

На этой вкладке вы найдете ответы на часто задаваемые вопросы и другую полезную информацию, которая поможет вам в решении вопросов и проблем.

Важная информация

На этой вкладке вы найдете подборку часто задаваемых вопросов, которые, на наш взгляд, будут вам интересны.

Коды ошибок

Код ошибки или сообщение об ошибке может появиться на устройстве по различным причинам. С помощью поля поиска можно найти полезную информацию о конкретном коде ошибки, где будут указаны причина ошибки и необходимые действия по ее устранению.

Технические характеристики

Ниже приведены все технические характеристики данного продукта.

Полезные ссылки

  • Ремонт

    Поиск центров по ремонту оборудования, полезная информация по процессу ремонта

  • Переработка

    Узнайте больше о программе утилизации картриджей Canon

  • Canon ID

    Регистрация продукта и управление аккаунтом Canon ID

1

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

© CANON INC. 2015 CT0-D002-000-F101-A

Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”

(=

14) section, before using the camera.

Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.

Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.

Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.

: Next page

: Previous page

: Page before you clicked a link

To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.

Camera User Guide

ENGLISH

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Initial Information

Package Contents

Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.

If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.

Camera Battery Pack

NB-13L*

Battery Charger

CB-2LH/CB-2LHE Wrist Strap

* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.

Printed matter is also included.

A memory card is not included (=

2).

Compatible Memory Cards

The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of

capacity.

SD memory cards*1

SDHC memory cards *1*2

SDXC memory cards*1*2

*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been

veried to work with the camera.

*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.

Before Use

3

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Conventions in This Guide

In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera

buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.

The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.

Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding

controls in “Part Names” (=

4).

[] Control ring (10) on front

Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in

brackets.

: Important information you should know

: Notes and tips for expert camera use

: Indicates touch-screen operations

= xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents

a page number)

Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.

For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as

the “memory card”.

The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate

how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.

Preliminary Notes and Legal Information

Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images

were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries

and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential

damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,

including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be

recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.

Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain

from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note

that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright

or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some

commercial settings.

The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of

camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before

contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-

precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the

pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be

defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate

camera damage or affect recorded images.

When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become

warm. This does not indicate damage.

4

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

(7)

(10

(6)(2)(1) (3) (4) (5)

(8)

(9)

(1) [ (Flash pop up)] switch

(2) Screen (monitor)*2

(3) Microphone

(4) DIGITAL terminal

(5) HDMI™ terminal

(6) Movie button

(7) [ (Quick Set menu/Set)] button

(8) [ ] button

(9) Indicator / USB charge lamp

(10) [ (Information)] button

*1 Used with NFC features (=

132).

*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this

case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (=

164).

Part Names

4)

2)

1)

3)

(11)

(8)

(17)

(14)(13)

(15)

(16)

(1) Lens

(2) Lamp

(3) Strap mount

(4) Zoom lever

Shooting: [ (telephoto)] /

[ (wide angle)]

Playback: [ (magnify)] /

[ (index)]

(5) Mode dial

(6) Shutter button

(7) Power button

(8) Speaker

(9) [ (Playback)] button

(10) Control ring

(11) Flash

(12) [ (Mobile Device Connection)]

button

(13) Serial number (Body number)

(14) (N-Mark)*1

(15) Tripod socket

(16) Memory card/battery cover

(17) DC coupler terminal cover

5

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Table of Contents

Before Use

Initial Information …………………………………………………….. 2

Package Contents ………………………………………………………….. 2

Compatible Memory Cards………………………………………………. 2

Preliminary Notes and Legal Information …………………………… 3

Conventions in This Guide ………………………………………………. 3

Part Names …………………………………………………………………… 4

Common Camera Operations ………………………………………… 12

Safety Precautions ……………………………………………………….. 14

Basic Guide

Basic Operations……………………………………………………. 17

Touch-Screen Operations………………………………………………. 17

Touching …………………………………………………………………………17

Dragging …………………………………………………………………………17

Initial Preparations………………………………………………………… 18

Attaching the Strap ………………………………………………………….. 18

Holding the Camera ………………………………………………………….18

Charging the Battery Pack …………………………………………………18

Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ……………….19

Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card …………………20

Setting the Date and Time ………………………………………………… 20

Changing the Date and Time ………………………………………….21

Display Language ……………………………………………………………. 21

Trying the Camera Out ………………………………………………….. 22

Shooting (Smart Auto) ………………………………………………………22

Viewing …………………………………………………………………………..23

Erasing images …………………………………………………………….24

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics ………………………………………………………. 25

On/Off …………………………………………………………………………. 25

Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ……………………….. 26

Power Saving in Shooting Mode …………………………………….26

Power Saving in Playback Mode ……………………………………. 26

Shutter Button ……………………………………………………………… 26

Shooting Modes …………………………………………………………… 27

Shooting Display Options ………………………………………………. 27

Using the Quick Set Menu……………………………………………… 28

Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings ………….28

Using the Menu Screen …………………………………………………. 29

Touch-Screen Operations ………………………………………………….30

On-Screen Keyboard…………………………………………………….. 30

Indicator Display …………………………………………………………… 31

Clock ………………………………………………………………………….. 32

Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ……………………………….. 33

Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings …………………….. 33

Shooting (Smart Auto) ………………………………………………………33

Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode …………………………………………… 35

Digest Movie Playback ………………………………………………….36

Still Images/Movies ………………………………………………………36

Still Images …………………………………………………………………. 36

Movies ………………………………………………………………………..36

Scene Icons ……………………………………………………………………. 37

Continuous Shooting Scenes …………………………………………38

Image Stabilization Icons …………………………………………………..38

On-Screen Frames …………………………………………………………..39

Common, Convenient Features ……………………………………… 39

Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) …………………….. 39

6

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ……53

Changing the Image Display Style after Shots …………………….. 54

Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ……………….54

Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots …………………….54

Other Shooting Modes ……………………………………………. 55

Applying Effects Automatically (Creative Shot) …………………. 55

Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot ………………………55

Choosing Effects ……………………………………………………………..56

Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects…………………………..56

Creative Shot Movie Playback ……………………………………….56

Specic Scenes ……………………………………………………………. 57

Applying Special Effects ………………………………………………… 58

Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ………..58

Adding Artistic Effects …………………………………………………… 59

Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) ………………………………59

Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ………… 59

Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) ………….60

Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time

(for One-Minute Clips) …………………………………………………..60

Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ………..61

Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) ………………61

Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ……………………………………….62

Shooting in Monochrome …………………………………………………..62

Special Modes for Other Purposes …………………………………. 63

Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ……………………………………………… 63

Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait) …………63

Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies

(Star Nightscape) …………………………………………………………64

Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) …………………………………….65

Shooting Movies of Star Movement

(Star Time-Lapse Movie) ……………………………………………….66

Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ……………………40

Using the Self-Timer ………………………………………………………… 40

Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake …………………..41

Customizing the Self-Timer ……………………………………………41

Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ………………..42

Continuous Shooting ………………………………………………………..42

Image Display during Playback ………………………………………43

Using Face ID………………………………………………………………. 43

Personal Information ………………………………………………………..43

Registering Face ID Information ………………………………………… 44

Shooting …………………………………………………………………………45

Checking and Editing Registered Information ………………………45

Overwriting and Adding Face Information ………………………..46

Erasing Registered Information ……………………………………… 47

Image Customization Features ………………………………………. 47

Changing the Aspect Ratio ……………………………………………….. 47

Changing Image Quality …………………………………………………… 48

Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ………..48

Changing Movie Image Quality ………………………………………….49

For NTSC Video …………………………………………………………..49

For PAL Video ………………………………………………………………49

Helpful Shooting Features ……………………………………………… 50

Using the Electronic Level ………………………………………………… 50

Magnifying the Area in Focus …………………………………………….50

Checking for Closed Eyes …………………………………………………51

Deactivating Auto Level ……………………………………………………. 51

Changing the IS Mode Settings …………………………………………. 52

Deactivating Image Stabilization …………………………………….52

Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown

before Shooting ……………………………………………………………….52

Customizing Camera Operation ……………………………………… 53

Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ………………………….53

7

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) …………………………..79

Custom Color……………………………………………………………….80

Shooting Range and Focusing ……………………………………….. 80

Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) ……………………………………………..80

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ……………………………………….. 81

Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ………………..82

Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ……………………………..82

Digital Tele-Converter ……………………………………………………….83

Choosing the AF Method ………………………………………………….. 83

1-point AF ……………………………………………………………………83

Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF) …………………..84

+Tracking ………………………………………………………………….84

Shooting with Servo AF …………………………………………………….85

Changing the Focus Setting ………………………………………………85

Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ……………………. 86

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ………………………… 86

Shooting with the AF Lock ………………………………………………… 87

Flash…………………………………………………………………………… 87

Changing the Flash Mode …………………………………………………87

Auto ……………………………………………………………………………87

On ………………………………………………………………………………87

Slow Synchro ………………………………………………………………88

Off ……………………………………………………………………………… 88

Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ……………………….88

Shooting with the FE Lock ………………………………………………… 89

Changing the Flash Timing ………………………………………………..89

Other Settings ……………………………………………………………… 90

Changing Image Quality …………………………………………………… 90

Capturing in RAW Format ……………………………………………..90

Using the Menu ……………………………………………………………91

Changing the IS Mode Settings …………………………………………. 91

Adjusting Colors …………………………………………………………..68

Adjusting the Focus ……………………………………………………… 68

Recording Various Movies ……………………………………………… 69

Recording Movies in [ ] Mode ………………………………………….69

Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording …. 69

Disabling Auto Slow Shutter ………………………………………….70

Correcting Severe Camera Shake ………………………………………70

Sound Settings ………………………………………………………………..70

Deactivating the Wind Filter …………………………………………..70

Using the Attenuator …………………………………………………….. 71

Recording Short Clips ……………………………………………………….71

Playback Effects …………………………………………………………..71

Recording iFrame Movies ………………………………………………….72

P Mode ………………………………………………………………….. 73

Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ………………………………… 73

Image Brightness (Exposure) …………………………………………. 74

Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ………… 74

Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ………………….74

Changing the Metering Method ………………………………………….74

Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame …………….75

Changing the ISO Speed …………………………………………………..75

Adjusting ISO Auto Settings …………………………………………..76

Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) ……………. 76

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ………………………….76

Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) …………………….77

Shadow Correct ……………………………………………………………77

Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings ……………………………………….77

Image Colors ……………………………………………………………….. 78

Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) …………………………..78

Custom White Balance …………………………………………………. 78

Manually Correcting White Balance ………………………………..78

8

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images

(Digest Movies) ………………………………………………………………106

Viewing by Date ………………………………………………………….106

Checking People Detected in Face ID ……………………………….107

Browsing and Filtering Images ……………………………………… 107

Navigating through Images in an Index …………………………….. 107

Touch-Screen Operations …………………………………………….108

Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions …………………..108

Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images ……………….109

Touch-Screen Operations ……………………………………………. 110

Viewing Individual Images in a Group ………………………………. 110

Editing Face ID Information …………………………………………… 111

Changing Names …………………………………………………………… 111

Erasing Names ……………………………………………………………… 111

Image Viewing Options …………………………………………………112

Magnifying Images ………………………………………………………… 112

Touch-Screen Operations ……………………………………………. 112

Viewing Slideshows ……………………………………………………….. 113

Protecting Images ………………………………………………………..113

Using the Menu …………………………………………………………….. 113

Choosing Images Individually ………………………………………….. 114

Selecting a Range …………………………………………………………. 114

Protecting All Images at Once …………………………………………. 115

Clearing All Protection at Once ……………………………………. 115

Erasing Images ……………………………………………………………115

Erasing Multiple Images at Once ……………………………………… 116

Choosing a Selection Method ……………………………………… 116

Choosing Images Individually ………………………………………. 116

Selecting a Range ……………………………………………………… 117

Specifying All Images at Once ……………………………………… 117

Rotating Images …………………………………………………………..117

Using the Menu …………………………………………………………….. 117

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode …………………………………………….. 92

Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)……………………………….. 92

Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ………………………..…….. 93

Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ….. 93

Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)…………………………………….. 94

Adjusting the Flash Output …………………………………………….. 95

Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture

Values …………………………………………………………………………. 95

Customizing Controls and Display ………………………………….. 96

Adjusting Settings while Switching Control Ring Functions …….96

Changing Control Ring Settings …………………………………………97

Functions Assignable to the Control Ring ………………………..97

Assigning Functions to the Control Ring ………………………….98

Customizing Display Information ……………………………………….. 98

Customizing the Information Displayed …………………………… 99

Assigning Functions to the Movie Button …………………………….99

Customizing the Quick Set Menu ………………………………….. 100

Choosing Items to Include in the Menu ……………………………..100

Rearranging Menu Items …………………………………………….. 100

Saving Shooting Settings …………………………………………….. 101

Settings That Can Be Saved ………………………………………..101

Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) …..101

Playback Mode …………………………………………………….. 103

Viewing ……………………………………………………………………… 103

Switching Display Modes …………………………………………………105

Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ……………….. 105

Histogram ………………………………………………………………….105

RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display …………………….. 105

Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot Mode

(Creative Shot Movies) …………………………………………………… 106

9

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ……………………..136

Using Another Access Point …………………………………………….137

Previous Access Points …………………………………………………..138

Saving Images to a Computer ………………………………………. 138

Preparing to Register a Computer ……………………………………. 138

Checking Your Computer Environment ………………………….138

Installing the Software …………………………………………………138

Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection

(Windows Only) ………………………………………………………….139

Saving Images to a Connected Computer ………………………….140

Conrming Access Point Compatibility ………………………….. 140

Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ………………………….140

Connecting to Listed Access Points ………………………………142

Previous Access Points ……………………………………………….143

Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ………………… 144

Registering Web Services ……………………………………………….144

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY …………………………144

Registering Other Web Services …………………………………..146

Uploading Images to Web Services ………………………………….146

Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer ………. 147

Sending Images to Another Camera ……………………………… 149

Image Sending Options ……………………………………………….. 150

Sending Multiple Images …………………………………………………150

Choosing Images Individually ……………………………………….150

Selecting a Range ………………………………………………………150

Sending Favorite Images …………………………………………….151

Notes on Sending Images ……………………………………………….151

Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ……..152

Adding Comments …………………………………………………………. 152

Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ………………….. 152

Initial Preparations …………………………………………………………. 152

Preparing the Camera …………………………………………………152

Deactivating Auto Rotation ……………………………………………… 118

Tagging Images as Favorites …………………………………………118

Using the Menu …………………………………………………………….. 118

Convenient Control: Touch Actions …………………………………119

Using Touch Actions Functions ………………………………………… 119

Changing Touch Actions Functions …………………………………..120

Assignable Functions ………………………………………………….120

Editing Still Images ……………………………………………………… 121

Resizing Images …………………………………………………………….121

Using the Menu ……………………………………………………………..121

Cropping ……………………………………………………………………….122

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) …………………………123

Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ………………………….. 123

Correcting Red-Eye ………………………………………………………..124

Editing Movies ……………………………………………………………. 125

Reducing File Sizes ……………………………………………………….. 126

Image Quality of Compressed Movies …………………………..126

Erasing Movie Chapters ………………………………………………….126

Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ………………………………… 127

Choosing Themes for Albums ………………………………………127

Adding Background Music to Albums ……………………………….. 128

Creating Your Own Albums ………………………………………………129

Combining Short Clips…………………………………………………. 130

Wi-Fi Functions ……………………………………………………. 131

Available Wi-Fi Features ……………………………………………… 131

Sending Images to a Smartphone …………………………………. 132

Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ………….132

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or

in Shooting Mode ……………………………………………………….132

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode 134

Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ……………….134

10

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Customizing Sounds ……………………………………………………….164

Start-Up Screen …………………………………………………………….. 164

Hiding Hints and Tips ………………………………………………………164

Listing Shooting Modes by Icon ………………………………………..164

Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity ………………………..164

Automatically Locking the Touch-Screen Panel ………………….165

Metric / Non-Metric Display ……………………………………………..165

Checking Certication Logos …………………………………………… 165

Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images ……………..165

Deleting All Copyright Information …………………………………166

Adjusting Other Settings …………………………………………………. 166

Restoring Default Camera Settings ………………………………….. 166

Accessories …………………………………………………………. 167

System Map ………………………………………………………………. 167

Optional Accessories …………………………………………………… 168

Power Supplies ………………………………………………………………168

Flash Unit ……………………………………………………………………..169

Other Accessories ………………………………………………………….169

Printers …………………………………………………………………………169

Photo and Movie Storage ……………………………………………….. 169

Using Optional Accessories………………………………………….. 170

Playback on a TV …………………………………………………………..170

Powering the Camera with Household Power ……………………. 171

Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack………………………… 172

Using a Computer to Charge the Battery ……………………….173

Using the Software ……………………………………………………… 173

Computer Connections via a Cable ………………………………….. 174

Checking Your Computer Environment ………………………….174

Installing the Software …………………………………………………174

Saving Images to a Computer …………………………………………. 174

Printing Images ………………………………………………………….. 175

Preparing the Computer ………………………………………………153

Sending Images ……………………………………………………………..154

Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone…..154

Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and

Control the Camera …………………………………………………….. 155

Geotagging Images on the Camera ………………………………….155

Shooting Remotely …………………………………………………………155

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings…………………………………… 156

Editing Connection Information ………………………………………..156

Changing a Device Nickname ………………………………………157

Erasing Connection Information ……………………………………157

Changing the Camera Nickname ………………………………….157

Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ……………………………..158

Setting Menu ………………………………………………………… 159

Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ……………………………….. 159

Date-Based Image Storage …………………………………………….. 159

File Numbering ………………………………………………………………159

Formatting Memory Cards ………………………………………………. 160

Low-Level Formatting …………………………………………………. 160

Changing the Video System …………………………………………….160

Electronic Level Calibration …………………………………………….. 161

Resetting the Electronic Level ……………………………………… 161

Switching the Color of Screen Information …………………………161

Using Eco Mode …………………………………………………………….161

Power-Saving Adjustment ……………………………………………….162

Screen Brightness ………………………………………………………….162

World Clock …………………………………………………………………..162

Date and Time ……………………………………………………………….163

Lens Retraction Timing …………………………………………………… 163

Display Language ………………………………………………………….. 163

Silencing Camera Operations …………………………………………..163

Adjusting the Volume ………………………………………………………164

11

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

[1] Tab …………………………………………………………………..195

[2] Tab …………………………………………………………………..196

[3] Tab …………………………………………………………………..197

[4] Tab …………………………………………………………………..198

[5] Tab …………………………………………………………………..199

[6] Tab …………………………………………………………………..200

[7] Tab …………………………………………………………………..201

[8] Tab …………………………………………………………………..201

Set Up Tab ……………………………………………………………………. 202

My Menu Tab …………………………………………………………………202

Playback Tab …………………………………………………………………202

Handling Precautions ………………………………………………….. 203

Specications …………………………………………………………….. 204

Camera ………………………………………………………………………… 204

Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time ……………… 205

Shooting Range …………………………………………………………….. 205

Number of Shots per Memory Card …………………………………..205

Recording Time per Memory Card ……………………………………206

Battery Pack NB-13L ………………………………………………………206

Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE …………………………………..206

Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E ………………….206

Index…………………………………………………………………………. 207

Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions …………………………………. 209

Radio Wave Interference Precautions ………………………………. 209

Security Precautions ……………………………………………………….209

Trademarks and Licensing …………………………………………..210

Disclaimer ………………………………………………………………….210

Easy Print ……………………………………………………………………..175

Conguring Print Settings ……………………………………………….. 176

Cropping Images before Printing …………………………………..177

Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ……………177

Available Layout Options …………………………………………….. 178

Printing ID Photos ………………………………………………………178

Printing Movie Scenes ……………………………………………………. 178

Movie Printing Options ………………………………………………..178

Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) …………………………….179

Conguring Print Settings …………………………………………….179

Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ……………………….179

Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images …………………….. 180

Setting Up Printing for All Images ………………………………….180

Clearing All Images from the Print List …………………………..180

Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) ……………… 180

Adding Images to a Photobook ………………………………………..181

Choosing a Selection Method ………………………………………181

Adding Images Individually …………………………………………..181

Adding All Images to a Photobook ………………………………..181

Removing All Images from a Photobook ………………………..181

Appendix ……………………………………………………………… 182

Troubleshooting ………………………………………………………….. 182

On-Screen Messages………………………………………………….. 186

On-Screen Information ………………………………………………… 188

Shooting (Information Display) …………………………………………188

Battery Level ……………………………………………………………..188

Playback (Detailed Information Display) …………………………….189

Summary of Movie Control Panel ………………………………….189

Functions and Menu Tables …………………………………………. 190

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ………………………190

Quick Set Menu ……………………………………………………………..192

Shooting Tab ………………………………………………………………….195

12

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Common Camera Operations

Shoot

Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)

=

33, =

35

See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined

settings (Creative Shot Mode)

=

55

Shooting people well

Portraits

(=

57)

Matching specic scenes

Night Scenes

(=

57)

Starry Skies

(=

63)

Fireworks

(=

57)

Applying special effects

Vivid Colors

(=

58)

Poster Effect

(=

58)

“Aged” Photos

(=

59)

Fish-Eye Effect

(=

59)

Miniature Effect

(=

60)

Toy Camera Effect

(=

61)

Background Defocus

(=

61)

Soft Focus

(=

62)

Monochrome

(=

62)

Focus on faces

=

33, =

57, =

84

Without using the ash (Flash Off)

=

33

Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)

=

40

Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)

=

35

13

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

Save

Save images to a computer

=

174

Use Wi-Fi Functions

Send images to a smartphone

=

132

Share images online

=

144

Send images to a computer

=

152

View

View images (Playback Mode)

=

103

Automatic playback (Slideshow)

=

113

On a TV

=

170

On a computer

=

174

Browse through images quickly

=

107

Erase images

=

115

Create an album automatically

=

127

Record/View Movies

Record movies

=

33, =

69, =

95

View movies (Playback Mode)

=

103

Print

Print pictures

=

175

14

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

If your model has a viewnder or interchangeable lens, do not look

through the viewnder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun

on a clear day, or a bright articial light source).

This may damage your eyesight.

If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or

the camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.

This could result in a re.

Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.

This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the

product and distance yourself from it.

Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.

Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.

This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in

electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into

contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.

If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.

Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any

dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power

outlet, and the surrounding area.

Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.

Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated

capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if

the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.

Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact

the terminals or plug.

Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if

your product uses one.

This could result in electrical shock or re.

Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.

The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the

operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate

caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices

is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.

Safety Precautions

Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions

described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.

The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and

other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.

Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold

accessories you use.

Warning

Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.

Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.

Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage

eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants

when using the ash.

Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.

A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.

If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a

child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.

Use only recommended power sources.

Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.

Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.

Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.

Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when

dropped.

Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange

smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.

Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to

clean the product.

Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects

inside.

This could result in electrical shock or re.

If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the

battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.

15

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to

avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.

This could result in injury.

Caution

Denotes the possibility of property damage.

Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a

clear day or an intense articial light source.

Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.

When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be

careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.

On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push

the ash down or pry it open.

This may cause the product to malfunction.

Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a

cotton swab or cloth.

The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the

product to malfunction.

Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using

the product.

Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.

Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with

tape or other insulators.

Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.

Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do

not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.

Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to

overheat and distort, resulting in re.

Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.

Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or

explosion, resulting in product damage or re.

Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended

periods.

Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature

burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot

places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.

Caution

Denotes the possibility of injury.

When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,

subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other

objects.

Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.

This could lead to injury or damage the camera.

Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.

If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.

When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or

clothing.

This could result in burns or damage to the ash.

Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:

Places subject to direct sunlight

Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)

Humid or dusty places

These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery

pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.

Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or

other injuries.

The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed

for prolonged periods.

When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if

applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.

If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the

shards of glass may lead to cuts.

16

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Index

Advanced Guide

If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that

have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and

new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –

terminals reversed.

This may cause the product to malfunction.

When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not

come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it

faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.

Do not attach any hard objects to the product.

Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.

17

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

Touch-Screen Operations

The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by

touching or tapping the screen.

Touching

Touch the screen briey with your nger.

zThis gesture is used to shoot, congure

camera functions, and so on.

Dragging

Touch the screen and move your nger

across it.

zThis gesture is used in Playback mode

to switch to the next image, or to change

the magnied image area, among other

operations.

Basic information and instructions, from initial

preparations to shooting and playback

Basic Guide

Basic Operations

18

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

Charging the Battery Pack

Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to

charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the

battery pack charged.

1 Insert the battery pack.

zAfter aligning the marks on the battery

pack and charger, insert the battery pack

by pushing it in (1) and down (2).

2 Charge the battery pack.

zCB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug

the charger into a power outlet (2).

zCB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the

charger, then plug the other end into a

power outlet.

zThe charging lamp turns orange, and

charging begins.

zWhen charging is nished, the lamp turns

green.

3 Remove the battery pack.

zAfter unplugging the battery charger,

remove the battery pack by pushing it in

(1) and up (2).

To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not

charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.

For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach

the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in

malfunction or damage to the product.

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

CB-2LH

(2)

(1)

Initial Preparations

Prepare for shooting as follows.

Attaching the Strap

zThread the end of the strap through the

strap mount (1), and then pull the other

end of the strap through the loop on the

threaded end (2).

zThe strap can also be attached to the left

side of the camera.

Holding the Camera

zPlace the strap around your wrist.

zWhen shooting, keep your arms close to

your body and hold the camera securely

to prevent it from moving. If you have

raised the ash, do not rest your ngers

on it.

(2)

(1)

19

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

2 Insert the battery pack.

zHolding the battery pack with the terminals

in the position shown (1), hold the battery

lock toward (2) and insert the battery pack

toward (3) until the lock clicks shut.

zIf you insert the battery pack facing the

wrong way, it cannot be locked into the

correct position. Always conrm that the

battery pack is facing the right way and

locks when inserted.

3 Check your card’s write-protect

switch and insert the memory card.

zRecording is not possible on memory

cards with a write-protect switch when the

switch is in the locked position. Move the

switch toward (1).

zInsert the memory card with the label (2)

facing as shown until it clicks into place.

zMake sure the memory card is facing the

right way when you insert it. Inserting

memory cards facing the wrong way may

damage the camera.

4 Close the cover.

zLower the cover (1) and hold it down as

you slide the switch, until it clicks into the

closed position (2).

For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be

saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory

Card” (=

205).

(3)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(1)

(1)

(2)

For details on charging time and the number of shots and

recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see

“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (=

205).

Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when

they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately

before) the day of use.

As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover

with visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an

uncharged one.

The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power

(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a

commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an

electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage

the battery pack.

Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory

Card

Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).

Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted

in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera

(=

160).

1 Open the cover.

zSlide the switch (1) and open the cover

(2).

(2)

(1)

20

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

2 Set the date and time.

zTouch the item to congure, and then

touch [ ][ ] to specify the date and

time.

zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.

3 Specify your home time zone.

zTouch [ ][ ] to choose your home time

zone.

4 Finish the setup process.

zPress the [ ] button when nished.

After a conrmation message, the setting

screen is no longer displayed.

zTo turn off the camera, press the power

button.

Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/

Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.

Specify the correct information.

To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), touch [ ] and

choose [ ] in step 2.

Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card

Remove the battery pack.

zOpen the cover and press the battery

lock in the direction of the arrow.

zThe battery pack will pop up.

Remove the memory card.

zPush the memory card in until it clicks,

and then slowly release it.

zThe memory card will pop up.

Setting the Date and Time

Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen

is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this

way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when

you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.

1 Turn the camera on.

zPress the power button.

zThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.

21

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

Display Language

Change the display language as needed.

1 Enter Playback mode.

zPress the [ ] button.

2 Access the setting screen.

zPress and hold the [ ] button, and then

immediately press the [ ] button.

3 Set the display language.

zTouch a display language to choose it,

and then press the [ ] button.

zOnce the display language has been set,

the setting screen is no longer displayed.

The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after

pressing the [ ] button before you press the [ ] button.

In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and

repeat step 2.

You can also change the display language by pressing the

[] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.

You can also set the display language by touching a language on

the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.

Changing the Date and Time

Adjust the date and time as follows.

1 Access the menu screen.

zPress the [ ] button.

2 Choose [Date/Time].

zTouch [ ], and then touch [2].

zTouch [Date/Time], and then press the

[] button.

3 Change the date and time.

zFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and

Time” (=

20) to adjust the settings.

zPress the [ ] button to close the

menu screen.

Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the

camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the

battery pack is removed.

The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you

insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC

adapter kit (sold separately, =

168), even if the camera is left

off.

Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will

be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date

and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=

20).

22

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

4 Shoot.

Shooting Still Images

1) Focus.

zPress the shutter button lightly, halfway

down. The camera beeps twice after

focusing, and frames are displayed to

indicate image areas in focus.

zIf [Raise the ash] is displayed, move

the [ ] switch to raise the ash. It will re

when shooting. If you prefer not to use

the ash, push it down with your nger,

into the camera.

2) Shoot.

zPress the shutter button all the way

down.

zAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound

is played, and in low-light conditions

when you have raised the ash, it res

automatically.

zKeep the camera still until the shutter

sound ends.

zAfter displaying your shot, the camera will

revert to the shooting screen.

Trying the Camera Out

Still Images Movies

Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or

movies, and then view them.

Shooting (Smart Auto)

For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,

simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

1 Turn the camera on.

zPress the power button.

zThe startup screen is displayed.

2 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

zAim the camera at the subject. The

camera will make a slight clicking noise

as it determines the scene.

zIcons representing the scene and image

stabilization mode are displayed in the

upper left of the screen.

zFrames displayed around any detected

subjects indicate that they are in focus.

3 Compose the shot.

zTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move

the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),

and to zoom away from the subject, move

it toward [ ] (wide angle).

23

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

Viewing

After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as

follows.

1 Enter Playback mode.

zPress the [ ] button.

zYour last shot is displayed.

2 Choose images.

zTo view the next image, drag right to

left across the screen, and to view the

previous image, drag left to right.

zTo access this screen (Scroll Display

mode), quickly drag left or right

repeatedly. In this mode, drag across the

screen to browse through images.

zPress the [ ] button to restore single-

image display.

zMovies are identied by a [ ] icon.

To play movies, go to step 3.

Recording Movies

1) Start recording.

zPress the movie button. The camera

beeps once as recording begins, and

[Rec] is displayed with the elapsed

time (1).

zBlack bars are displayed on the top and

bottom edges of the screen, and the

subject is slightly enlarged. The black

bars indicate image areas not recorded.

zFrames displayed around any detected

faces indicate that they are in focus.

zOnce recording begins, take your nger

off the movie button.

2) Finish recording.

zPress the movie button again to stop

recording. The camera beeps twice as

recording stops.

24

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Advanced Guide

Basic Guide

3 Play movies.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

then press the [ ] button.

zPlayback now begins, and after the movie

is nished, [ ] is displayed.

zTo adjust the volume, quickly drag up or

down across the screen during playback.

To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the

shutter button halfway.

You can also start movie playback by touching [ ].

Erasing images

You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful

when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.

1 Choose an image to erase.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

2 Erase the image.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

then press the [ ] button.

zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, touch [Erase].

zThe current image is now erased.

zTo cancel erasure, touch [Cancel].

Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (=

119).

You can choose multiple images to erase at once (=

116).

25

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

On/Off

Shooting Mode

zPress the power button to turn the

camera on and prepare for shooting.

zTo turn the camera off, press the power

button again.

Playback Mode

zPress the [ ] button to turn the camera

on and view your shots.

zTo turn the camera off, press the [ ]

button again.

To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]

button.

To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the

shutter button halfway (=

26).

The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera

is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is

retracted by pressing the [ ] button.

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your

camera, including shooting and playback options

26

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Shutter Button

To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter

button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all

the way down to shoot.

In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the

button halfway or all the way down.

1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to

focus.)

zPress the shutter button halfway. The

camera beeps twice, and frames are

displayed around image areas in focus.

2 Press all the way down. (From the

halfway position, press fully to

shoot.)

zThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound

is played.

zKeep the camera still until the shutter

sound ends.

Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing

the shutter button halfway.

Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time

required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,

and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject

moves) before the shutter sound ends.

Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)

As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates

the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of

inactivity.

Power Saving in Shooting Mode

The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of

inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera

turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when

the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway

(=

26).

Power Saving in Playback Mode

The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of

inactivity.

You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of

Display Off, if you prefer (=

162).

Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other

devices via Wi-Fi (=

131), or when connected to a computer

(=

174).

27

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Shooting Display Options

Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic

level.

To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab ►

[Shooting information display] (=

98).

Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view

function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier

to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image

brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that

any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not

affect recorded images.

For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”

(=

105).

Shooting Modes

Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.

1)

2)

(

)(

(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode

Fully automatic shooting, with

camera-determined settings

(=

22, =

33, =

35).

(2) Creative Shot Mode

See several effects applied to

each shot automatically (=

55).

(3) Special Scene Mode

Shoot with settings designed for

specic scenes, or add a variety of

effects (=

57).

(4) Movie Mode

For shooting movies (=

69,

=

95).

You can also shoot movies when

the mode dial is not set to Movie

mode, simply by pressing the

movie button.

(5) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes

Take a variety of shots using

your preferred settings (=

73,

=

92).

28

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the

camera’s default settings (=

166).

You can also exit by touching [ ] in the menu.

Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure

Settings

zTouch [ ] in the upper right of the screen

to access the Quick Set menu.

zTouch a menu item and then an option to

complete the setting.

zTo return to the previous screen, touch

the [ ] menu item, or touch the selected

option again.

zYou can access the screen for items

labeled with a [ ] icon by touching

[ ].

zYou can access the screen for items

labeled with a [ ] icon by touching

[ ].

Using the Quick Set Menu

Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.

Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode

(=

192).

1 Access the menu.

zPress the [ ] button.

2 Choose a menu item.

zTouch a menu item (1) to choose it.

zAvailable options (2) are shown at the

bottom of the screen.

3 Choose an option.

zDrag an option left or right to choose it.

zItems labeled with a [ ] icon can

be congured by pressing the [ ]

button.

zItems labeled with a [ ] icon can

be congured by pressing the [ ]

button.

4 Conrm your choice and exit.

zPress the [ ] button.

zThe screen before you pressed the

[] button in step 1 is displayed again,

showing the option you congured.

29

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

4 Choose an option.

zTouch an option to choose it.

5 Conrm your choice and exit.

zPress the [ ] button to conrm your

choice and return to the menu item

selection screen.

zPress the [ ] button to return to the

screen displayed before you pressed the

[] button in step 1.

To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the

camera’s default settings (=

166).

Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or

playback mode (=

195 – =

202).

Using the Menu Screen

Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as

follows.

1 Access the menu screen.

zPress the [ ] button.

2 Choose a tab.

zTouch a tab to choose it.

zTabs represent functions (1), such as

shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or

settings ([ ]), or pages within each

function (2). Tabs are identied in this

manual by combining the function and

page, as in [ 1].

zPage tabs can also be selected by

moving the zoom lever or dragging left or

right across the screen.

3 Choose a menu item.

zTouch an item to choose it, and then

press the [ ] button.

zYou can also choose menu items by

turning the [ ] ring.

zFor menu items with options not shown,

rst press the [ ] button to switch

screens, and then touch an item to

choose it.

zTo return to the previous screen, press

the [ ] button.

30

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

On-Screen Keyboard

Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (=

43),

Wi-Fi connections (=

131), and so on. Note that the length and type of

information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.

Entering Characters

zTouch the characters to enter them.

zThe amount of information you can enter

(1) varies depending on the function you

are using.

Moving the Cursor

zTouch [ ][ ].

Entering Line Breaks

zTouch [ ].

Switching Input Modes

zTo switch to numbers or symbols, touch

[ ].

zTouch [ ] to enter capital letters.

zAvailable input modes vary depending on

the function you are using.

Deleting Characters

zTouch [ ] to delete the previous

character.

zTouching and holding [ ] will delete ve

characters at a time.

Touch-Screen Operations

To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,

and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.

Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item

to choose it.

Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item

selection screen.

For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the

desired position on the bar.

To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch

the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,

either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the

option. To return to the previous screen, touch [ ].

You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)

to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen

keyboard.

When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the

[] button, if you prefer.

When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the

[] button, if you prefer.

When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the

[] button, if you prefer.

To dismiss the menu, press the [ ] button again.

31

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Indicator Display

The indicator on the back of the camera (=

4) lights up or blinks

depending on the camera status.

Color Indicator

Status Camera Status

Green Blinking

Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting

images, shooting long exposures (=

92,

=

93), connected to a computer (=

174),

connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display

off (=

26, =

161, =

162)

Orange On Charging via USB

When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open

the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which

may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.

Conrming Input and Returning to the

Previous Screen

zPress the [ ] button.

For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.

32

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Clock

You can check the current time.

zPress and hold the [ ] button.

zThe current time appears.

zIf you hold the camera vertically while

using the clock function, it will switch to

vertical display.

zTurn the [ ] ring to change the display

color.

zPress the [ ] button again to cancel the

clock display.

When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then

press the power button to display the clock.

33

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings

For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,

simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

Shooting (Smart Auto)

Still Images Movies

1 Turn the camera on.

zPress the power button.

zThe startup screen is displayed.

2 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

zAim the camera at the subject. The

camera will make a slight clicking noise

as it determines the scene.

zIcons representing the scene and image

stabilization mode are displayed in

the upper left of the screen (=

37,

=

38).

zFrames displayed around any detected

subjects indicate that they are in focus.

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control

over shooting

34

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

2) Shoot.

zPress the shutter button all the way down.

zAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound

is played, and in low-light conditions

when you have raised the ash, it res

automatically.

zKeep the camera still until the shutter

sound ends.

zAfter displaying your shot, the camera will

revert to the shooting screen.

Recording Movies

1) Start recording.

zPress the movie button. The camera beeps

once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is

displayed with the elapsed time (1).

zBlack bars are displayed on the top and

bottom edges of the screen, and the

subject is slightly enlarged. The black

bars indicate image areas not recorded.

zFrames displayed around any detected

faces indicate that they are in focus.

zOnce recording begins, take your nger

off the movie button.

2) Resize the subject and recompose

the shot as needed.

zTo resize the subject, repeat the

operations in step 3.

However, note that the sound of camera

operations will be recorded. Note that

movies shot at zoom factors shown in

blue will look grainy.

zWhen you recompose shots, the

focus, brightness, and colors will be

automatically adjusted.

3 Compose the shot.

zTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move

the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),

and to zoom away from the subject, move

it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom

bar (1) showing the zoom position is

displayed, along with the range of focus

(2).)

4 Shoot.

Shooting Still Images

1) Focus.

zPress the shutter button halfway. The

camera beeps twice after focusing, and

frames are displayed to indicate image

areas in focus.

zSeveral frames are displayed when

multiple areas are in focus.

zIf [Raise the ash] is displayed, move

the [ ] switch to raise the ash. It will re

when shooting. If you prefer not to use

the ash, push it down with your nger,

into the camera.

(

)

35

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

3 Shoot.

zFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”

(=

33) to shoot a still image.

zThe camera records both a still image

and movie clip. The clip, which ends with

the still image and a shutter sound, forms

a single chapter in the digest movie.

Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because

digest movies are recorded for each shot.

A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image

immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or

operating the camera in other ways.

Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded

in digest movies.

Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [ ] for

NTSC or [ ] for PAL and cannot be changed (=

160).

Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway

or trigger the self-timer (=

164).

Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following

cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.

The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the

total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40

seconds.

The digest movie is protected (=

113).

Daylight saving time (=

20) or time zone (=

162) settings

are changed.

A new folder is created (=

159).

Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.

If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust

the setting in advance. Choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 7] tab ►

[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].

Individual chapters can be edited (=

126).

3) Finish recording.

zPress the movie button again to stop

recording. The camera beeps twice as

recording stops.

zRecording will stop automatically when

the memory card becomes full.

The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has

automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main

subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).

Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode

Still Images Movies

You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The

camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are

later combined in a digest movie.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”

(=

33) and choose [ ].

2 Compose the shot.

zFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart

Auto)” (=

33) to compose the shot and

focus.

zFor more impressive digest movies,

aim the camera at subjects about four

seconds before shooting still images.

36

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

You can change how long images are displayed after shots

(=

54).

Movies

Before movie recording, lower the ash with your nger. During

recording, keep your ngers away from the microphone (1).

Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent

audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound

mufed.

Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when

recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be

recorded.

Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes

and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant

camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before

shooting, set Dynamic IS to [Low] (=

52).

1

Audio is recorded in stereo.

Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can

be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when

this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not

strong, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 7] tab ► [Wind Filter] ►

[Off] (=

70).

During movie recording, lens operating noises from auto focusing

may also be recorded.

Digest Movie Playback

Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created

on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (=

106).

Still Images/Movies

If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been

turned on while holding down the [ ] button. To activate

sounds, press the [ ] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]

tab, and then choose [Off].

Still Images

A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be

blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a

tripod or take other measures to keep it still.

If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the

subject. For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (=

204).

The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once

when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the

range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (=

205).

To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit

when shooting in low-light conditions.

A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot

indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished

recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,

so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or

release it and press it again.

No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping

Babies” icons (=

37) are displayed.

Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen

is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,

brightness, and colors used.

37

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,

and the background color of [ ] is orange.

For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range

Subjects icons are displayed.

In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,

Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.

For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:

moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;

moving children; and other moving subjects.

Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving

children in drive modes other than [ ] (=

38, =

42) and when

[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected

(=

48).

Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people

when the ash is set to [ ].

Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving

children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of

registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years

old) are detected (=

44). Conrm beforehand that the date and time

are correct (=

20).

Try shooting in [ ] mode (=

73) if the scene icon does not

match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot

with your expected effect, color, or brightness.

Scene Icons

Still Images Movies

In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera

are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are

automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.

Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (=

38).

Subject

Background

Normal Backlit Dark*1Sunsets Spotlights

People *2*3

Moving People *3*3

Shadows on Face *2

Smiling *3*3

Sleeping *2*3

Babies *3*3

Smiling Babies *3*3

Sleeping Babies *2*3

Moving Children *3*3

Other Subjects *2*3

Other Moving Subjects *3*3

Other Close-Range

Subjects *2*3

*1 Tripod used.

*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,

dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.

*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,

and gray for all other backgrounds.

38

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Image Stabilization Icons

Still Images Movies

Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is

automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.

Image stabilization for still images (Normal)

Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*

Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in

macro shots (Hybrid IS).

For movies, [ ] is displayed and [ ] image stabilization is also

applied.

Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as

when recording while walking (Dynamic)

Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when

recording movies at telephoto (Powered)

No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on

a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie

recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract

wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).

* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you

follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical

camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow

subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera

shake.

To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=

52). In

this case, an IS icon is not displayed.

In [ ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.

Continuous Shooting Scenes

If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is

displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If

the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed

when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or

[] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.

Smiling

(including Babies)

Consecutive images are captured, and the camera

analyzes details such as facial expressions to save

the image determined to be the best.

Sleeping

(including Babies)

Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by

combining consecutive shots to reduce camera

shake and image noise.

The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re, and

the shutter sound will not be played.

Children So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children

who move around, the camera will capture three

consecutive images for each shot.

In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images

may not look as expected.

Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst

shot.

When you want to shoot single images only, touch [ ], choose

[] in the menu, and then select [ ].

39

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Common, Convenient Features

Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)

Still Images Movies

When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,

use digital zoom for up to about 12x enlargement.

1 Move the zoom lever toward [ ].

zHold the lever until zooming stops.

zZooming stops at the largest zoom factor

before the image becomes noticeably

grainy, which is then indicated on the

screen.

2 Move the zoom lever toward [ ]

again.

zThe camera zooms in even closer on the

subject.

z(1) is the current zoom factor.

Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates

the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the

zoom range.

White range: optical zoom range where the image will not

appear grainy.

Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not

noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).

Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.

Because the blue range will not be available at some recording

pixel settings (=

90), the maximum zoom factor can be

achieved by following step 1.

On-Screen Frames

Still Images Movies

In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera

detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.

A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)

determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are

displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects

within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera

detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the

screen.

When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera

detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus

and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).

Try shooting in [ ] mode (=

73) if no frames are displayed, if

frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are

displayed on the background or similar areas.

To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the

screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode

(=

86). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue

frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image

brightness adjusted (Servo AF).

40

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Using the Self-Timer

Still Images Movies

With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other

timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the

shutter button.

1 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

28).

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

2 Shoot.

zFor Still Images: Press the shutter button

halfway to focus on the subject, and then

press it all the way down.

zFor Movies: Press the movie button.

zOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp

will blink and the camera will play a self-

timer sound.

zTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking

and sound will speed up. (The lamp will

remain lit in case the ash res.)

zTo cancel shooting after you have

triggered the self-timer, press the

[] button.

zTo restore the original setting, choose [ ]

in step 1.

To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 2] tab

► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].

Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)

Still Images Movies

Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 28 – 84 mm (35mm lm

equivalent).

zTo change the focal length from 28 to

35 mm, turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise

until it clicks. Turn the [ ] ring

counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise

to zoom out.

Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you

turn the [ ] ring.

When you are using digital zoom (=

39), you cannot adjust the

zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,

you can set the focal length to 84 mm by turning it clockwise.

41

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Customizing the Self-Timer

Still Images Movies

You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).

1 Choose [ ].

zFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”

(=

40), choose [ ] and press the

[] button.

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch the delay time or number of shots

to choose one of these items.

zTouch [ ][ ] to choose a value, and then

press the [ ] button twice.

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

zFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”

(=

40) to shoot.

For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after

your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has

no effect.

When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white

balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required

between shots when the ash res or when you have specied

to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the

memory card becomes full.

When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds

before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed

up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)

You can also cancel shooting after the timer begins by touching

the screen.

Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake

Still Images Movies

This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you

have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are

pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.

zFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”

(=

40) and choose [ ].

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

zFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”

(=

40) to shoot.

42

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Continuous Shooting

Still Images Movies

In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot

continuously.

For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (=

204).

1 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

28).

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

2 Shoot.

zHold the shutter button all the way down

to shoot continuously.

During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are

locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the

shutter button halfway.

Cannot be used with the self-timer (=

40).

Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow

down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the

zoom position.

As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.

Shooting may slow down if the ash res.

Multi-area White Balance (=

33) is not available. Also note that

these features are not available.

[Hg Lamp Corr.] (=

48)

[Blink Detection] (=

51)

With Touch Shutter (=

42), the camera shoots continuously

while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during

continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined

for the rst shot.

Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter)

Still Images Movies

With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply

touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus

on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.

1 Enable the touch-shutter function.

zTouch [ ] and change it to [ ].

2 Shoot.

zTouch the subject on the screen to take

the picture.

zThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound

is played.

zTo cancel touch shutter, choose [ ] in

step 1.

Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next

shot by touching [ ].

You can also congure touch-shutter settings by choosing MENU

(=

29) ► [ 2] tab ► [Touch Shutter]. To hide the Touch

Shutter setting icon, set [Touch shutter icon] to [Off].

43

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Using Face ID

If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s

face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when

shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children

based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when

shooting.

This function also enables you to nd shots you have taken that include

registered people (=

108).

Personal Information

Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with

Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved

on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,

their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID

function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,

and when posting images online where many others can view them.

When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after

using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,

names, and birthdays) from the camera (=

47).

Image Display during Playback

Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,

and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that

the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the

screen.

If you erase a grouped image (=

115), all images in the group

are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.

Grouped images can be played back individually (=

110) and

ungrouped (=

110).

Protecting (=

113) a grouped image will protect all images in

the group.

Grouped images can be viewed individually when played

back using Image Search (=

107). In this case, images are

temporarily ungrouped.

The following actions are not available for grouped images:

editing Face ID information (=

111), magnifying (=

112),

tagging as favorites (=

118), editing (=

121), printing

(=

175), setting up individual image printing (=

179), or

adding to a photobook (=

181). To do these things, either

view grouped images individually (=

110) or cancel grouping

(=

110) rst.

44

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

zAfter [Register?] is displayed, touch [OK].

zThe [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.

3 Register the person’s name and

birthday.

zTouch the name text box to access the

keyboard, and then enter the name

(=

30).

zTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]

screen, touch the birthday text box.

zTouch an option to choose it.

zTouch [ ][ ] to specify the date.

zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.

4 Save the settings.

zTouch [Save].

zAfter a message is displayed, touch [Yes].

5 Continue registering face

information.

zTo register up to 4 more points of face

information (expressions or angles),

repeat step 2.

zRegistered faces are more easily

recognized if you add a variety of face

information. In addition to a head-on

angle, add a slight side angle, a shot

when smiling, and shots inside and

outside.

Registering Face ID Information

You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12

people to use with Face ID.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Face

ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

zTouch [Add to Registry] to choose it, and

then press the [ ] button.

zChoose [Add a New Face] and press the

[] button.

2 Register face information.

zAim the camera so that the face of the

person you want to register is inside the

gray frame at the center of the screen.

zA white frame on the person’s face

indicates that the face is recognized.

Make sure a white frame is displayed on

the face, and then shoot.

zIf the face is not recognized, you cannot

register face information.

45

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured

image or scene differs drastically from the registered face

information.

If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,

overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering

face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of

registered faces.

If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you

continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the

image during playback (=

111).

Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they

grow, you should update their face info regularly (=

44).

Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the

[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information

Displayed” (=

99) so that the names are not displayed.

If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face

ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose

[Off].

You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen

(simple information display) (=

105).

In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,

but they will be recorded in still images.

Names recorded in continuous shooting (=

42) continue to be

recorded in the same position as the rst shot, even if subjects

move.

Checking and Editing Registered Information

1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.

zFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID

Information” (=

44), choose [Check/

Edit Info].

The ash will not re when following step 2.

If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons

(=

37) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.

You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if

you have not lled all 5 face info slots (=

44).

Shooting

If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that

person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for

that person when shooting.

zWhen you point the camera toward

people, the names of up to 3 registered

people will be displayed when they are

detected.

zShoot.

zDisplayed names will be recorded in still

images. The names of detected people

(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,

even if the names are not displayed.

People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected

as the registered person if they share similar facial features.

46

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

2 Choose a person to overwrite their

face info.

zTouch the name of the person whose

face info you want to overwrite.

zIf ve items of face info have already

been registered, a message will be

displayed. Touch [OK].

zIf less than ve items of face info are

registered, go to step 4 to add face

information.

3 Choose the face info to overwrite.

zTouch the face info you want to overwrite.

4 Register face information.

zFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID

Information” (=

44) to shoot, and then

register the new face information.

zRegistered faces are more easily

recognized if you add a variety of face

information. In addition to a head-on

angle, add a slight side angle, a shot

when smiling, and shots inside and

outside.

You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.

Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.

You can follow the above steps to register new face info when

there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite

any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase

unwanted existing info (=

45), and then register new face

information (=

44) as needed.

2 Choose a person to check or edit

their information.

zTouch the image of the person whose

information you want to check or edit.

3 Check or edit the information as

needed.

zTo check a name or birthday, touch

[Edit Prole]. On the screen displayed,

you can edit the name or birthday as

described in step 3 of “Registering Face

ID Information” (=

44).

zTo check face information, touch [Face

Info List]. To erase face information, touch

[Erase] on the screen displayed, and then

touch the face information to erase. After

[Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].

Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in

previously shot images will remain the same.

Overwriting and Adding Face Information

You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should

update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as

their faces change quickly as they grow.

You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been

lled.

1 Access the [Add Face Info] screen.

zFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID

Information” (=

44), choose [Add Face

Info].

47

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Image Customization Features

Changing the Aspect Ratio

Still Images Movies

Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

zOnce the setting is complete, the screen

aspect ratio will be updated.

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [ ].

Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.

Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as

35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.

Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar display

devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series

sizes.

Square aspect ratio.

Not available in [ ] mode.

You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=

29)

► [ 1] tab ► [Still Image Aspect Ratio].

Erasing Registered Information

You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to

Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be

erased.

1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.

zFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID

Information” (=

44) and choose [Erase

Info].

2 Choose a person to erase their

information.

zTouch the name of the person to erase.

zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].

If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to

display their name (=

107), overwrite their info (=

111), or

search for images that include them (=

108).

You can also erase names in image information (=

111).

48

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Correcting Greenish Image Areas from

Mercury Lamps

Still Images Movies

In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes

illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This

greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-

area White Balance.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Hg

Lamp Corr.] on the [ 6] tab, and then

choose [On] (=

29).

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [Off].

After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should

set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not

caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.

Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

In continuous shooting (=

42), this setting is set to [Off] and

cannot be changed.

Changing Image Quality

Still Images Movies

Choose from 4 levels of image quality. For guidelines on how many of

each kind of image can t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per

Memory Card” (=

205).

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [ ].

Guidelines for choosing image quality based on paper size (for 3:2 images)

A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)

A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)

3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard

For e-mailing and similar purposes

Not available in [ ] mode.

You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU

(=

29) ► [ 1] tab ► [Image quality] (=

90).

49

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

For PAL Video

Image

Quality

Number of Recording

Pixels Frame Rate Details

*1920 x 1080 50.00 fps For shooting in Full

HD.

1920 x 1080 25.00 fps

1280 x 720 25.00 fps For shooting in HD.

640 x 480 25.00 fps For shooting in

standard denition.

* Available in [ ] or [ ] mode.

After repeated recording in [ ] or [ ] mode, movie

recording at that level of quality may be temporarily unavailable

(even if you press the movie button) until the camera has cooled

down. To continue recording in [ ] or [ ] mode

instead, touch [Yes] after the notication message is displayed.

Otherwise, turn the camera off and wait a while for it to cool down

before you resume recording.

Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [ ] and

[] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],

[], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and

[] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.

You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=

29)

► [ 8] tab ► [Movie Quality].

Changing Movie Image Quality

Still Images Movies

Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate

indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined

automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (=

160). For guidelines

on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality

that will t on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card”

(=

206).

zPress the [ ] button, choose the movie

quality menu item, and then choose the

desired option (=

28).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

For NTSC Video

Image

Quality

Number of Recording

Pixels Frame Rate Details

*1920 x 1080 59.94 fps For shooting in Full

HD. [ ] enables

movies with smoother

motion.

1920 x 1080 29.97 fps

1920 x 1080 23.98 fps

1280 x 720 29.97 fps For shooting in HD.

640 x 480 29.97 fps For shooting in

standard denition.

* Available in [ ] or [ ] mode.

50

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Magnifying the Area in Focus

Still Images Movies

You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will

enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.

1 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[AF-Point Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and

then choose [On] (=

29).

2 Check the focus.

zPress the shutter button halfway. The

face detected as the main subject is now

magnied.

zTo restore the original setting, choose

[Off] in step 1.

The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the

shutter button is pressed halfway.

If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the

camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the

camera detects subject movement

When digital zoom is used (=

39)

Not available in [ ] mode.

Helpful Shooting Features

Using the Electronic Level

Still Images Movies

An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a

guideline to determine if the camera is level.

1 Display the electronic level.

zPress the [ ] button to display the

electronic level.

2 Level the camera as needed.

zLevel the camera so that the center of the

electronic level is green.

If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the

[] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab ► [Shooting

information display].

Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you

from using the electronic level, which will turn gray.

The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.

If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic

level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation.

Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you

level the camera (=

161).

Not available in [ ] mode.

51

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Deactivating Auto Level

Still Images Movies

Normally, auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature,

choose [Disable].

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

zChoose [Disable] (=

29).

Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects

are enlarged (=

52).

Checking for Closed Eyes

Still Images Movies

[] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed

their eyes.

1 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Blink

Detection] on the [ 7] tab, and then

choose [On] (=

29).

2 Shoot.

z[] ashes when the camera detects a

person whose eyes are closed.

zTo restore the original setting, choose

[Off] in step 1.

When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this

function is only available for the nal shot.

A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when

you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display

Time] (=

54).

This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ]

mode (=

38).

This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode

(=

42).

52

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same

Size Shown before Shooting

Still Images Movies

Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes

and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction

of signicant camera shake.

To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,

you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.

zSet [ Auto level] to [Disable] as

described in “Deactivating Auto Level”

(=

51).

zFollow step 1 in “Deactivating Image

Stabilization” (=

52) to access the [IS

Settings] screen.

zChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose

[Low] (=

29).

You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded

at the same size shown before shooting.

[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]

(=

52).

Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [ ]

(NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).

Changing the IS Mode Settings

Deactivating Image Stabilization

Still Images Movies

When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should

set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [IS

Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch [IS Mode], and then choose an

option (=

29).

Continuous Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is

automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (=

38).

Off Deactivates image stabilization.

53

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from

Lighting Up

Still Images Movies

You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce

red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.

1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press

the [ ] button.

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then

choose [Off].

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [On].

Customizing Camera Operation

Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as

follows.

For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”

(=

29).

Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing

Still Images Movies

You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus

when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[AF-assist Beam] on the [ 3] tab, and

then choose [Off].

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [On].

54

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots

Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.

1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],

[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=

54).

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose [Display Info], and then choose

the desired option.

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [Off].

Off Displays only the image.

Detailed Displays shooting details (=

189).

When [Display Time] (=

54) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display

Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.

By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after

shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the

settings of [Display Info] are not changed.

Changing the Image Display Style after Shots

Still Images Movies

You can change how long images are displayed and what information is

displayed immediately after shooting.

Changing the Image Display Period after Shots

1 Access the [Review image after

shooting] screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Review image after shooting] on the

[1] tab, and then press the [ ] button.

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose [Display Time], and then choose

the desired option.

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [Quick].

Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.

2 sec., 4 sec.,

8 sec.

Displays images for the specied time. Even while

the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by

pressing the shutter button halfway again.

Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button

halfway.

Off No image display after shots.

55

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Applying Effects Automatically

(Creative Shot)

Still Images Movies

Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot

The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically

applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the

subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture

multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Shoot.

zPress the shutter button all the way

down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is

played three times.

zAfter the six images are displayed

in succession, they are displayed

simultaneously for about two seconds.

zTo keep the images displayed until you

press the shutter button halfway or press

the [ ] button, press the [ ] button

while the images are displayed. You can

choose an image for full-screen display

by touching the image and then pressing

the [ ] button.

zTo return to the original display, press the

[] button.

Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the

camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.

The six images are managed together as a group (=

110).

Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only

available immediately after you shoot.

Other Shooting Modes

Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and

take shots enhanced with unique image effects or

captured using special functions

56

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

3 Record the second to fourth movies.

zRepeat step 2 three times to record four

movies.

Even if you do not record four movies that day, a Creative Shot

movie will be saved as a separate le once the date changes.

Effects are generally applied consistently to movies 1 – 4, but you

can also change the effect in each movie (=

56).

Individual chapters can be edited (=

126).

Creative Shot Movie Playback

You can choose and play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ]

mode (=

106).

Choosing Effects

You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.

zAfter choosing [ ] mode, turn the [ ]

ring to choose the effect.

Auto All effects

Retro Images resemble old photos

Monochrome Images are generated in one color

Special Bold, distinctive-looking images

Natural Subdued, natural-looking images

Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects

Let the camera determine subjects and shooting conditions when you

record movies, and lters and effects such as playback in slow or fast

motion will be added automatically. Once you have recorded a few

movies, up to four are automatically combined to create a Creative Shot

movie of 15 – 25 seconds. Note that sound is not recorded in this mode.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Record the rst movie.

zPress the movie button. Recording

begins, and a bar is displayed to indicate

the elapsed time.

zRecording stops automatically in

3 – 6 seconds.

57

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Shooting Evening Scenes without

Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene)

Still Images Movies

zBeautiful shots of evening scenes or

portraits with evening scenery in the

background, without the need to hold the

camera very still (as with a tripod).

zA single image is created by combining

consecutive shots, reducing camera

shake and image noise.

Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)

Still Images Movies

zVivid shots of reworks.

Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.

In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed

(=

75) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.

Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it

steady while shooting.

In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions

may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.

In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other

measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,

you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=

52).

When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]

mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (=

33).

You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU

(=

29) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].

In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press

the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.

Specic Scenes

Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will

automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Choose a shooting mode.

zTouch [ ], and then touch [ ][ ] or drag

up or down on the screen to choose a

shooting mode.

zTo conrm your choice, touch [OK].

3 Shoot.

Shooting Portraits (Portrait)

Still Images Movies

zTake shots of people with a softening

effect.

58

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Shooting High-Contrast Scenes

(High Dynamic Range)

Still Images Movies

Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels

each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal

brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-

out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-

contrast shots.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Shoot.

zHold the camera steady as you shoot.

When you press the shutter button all

the way down, the camera will take three

shots and combine them.

Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent

you from obtaining the desired results.

If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount

the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.

Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod

or other means to secure the camera (=

52).

Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes and combines the images.

[] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway

in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal

image brightness.

Applying Special Effects

Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.

Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)

Still Images Movies

zShots in rich, vivid colors.

Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)

Still Images Movies

zShots that resemble an old poster or

illustration.

In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make

sure you obtain the desired results.

You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU

(=

29) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].

59

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging

effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see

the effect (=

103).

The image aging effect is not shown in movies.

Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect

(Fish-Eye Effect)

Still Images Movies

Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect

level.

zA preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

Adding Artistic Effects

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect.

zA preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

Natural Images are natural and organic.

Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.

Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.

Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.

Art Embossed Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and

dark ambiance.

Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)

Still Images Movies

This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old

photographs. Choose from ve effect levels.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect

level.

zA preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

60

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time

(for One-Minute Clips)

Speed Playback Time

Approx. 12 sec.

Approx. 6 sec.

Approx. 3 sec.

Movies are played back at 30 fps.

The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set

the zoom before shooting.

Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ]

button in step 2. Touch the screen to move the frame. To return

the frame to horizontal orientation, press the [ ] button again.

Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the

frame.

Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at

an aspect ratio of [ ] (=

47). These quality settings cannot

be changed.

Shots Resembling Miniature Models

(Miniature Effect)

Still Images Movies

Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above

and below your selected area.

You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by

choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and

objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is

not recorded.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

zA white frame is displayed, indicating the

image area that will not be blurred.

2 Choose the area to keep in focus.

zPress the [ ] button.

zMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,

and touch the screen or drag the white

frame up or down to move it.

3 For movies, choose the movie

playback speed.

zOn the screen in step 2, turn the [ ] ring

to choose the speed.

4 Return to the shooting screen and

shoot.

zPress the [ ] button to return to the

shooting screen, and then shoot.

61

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)

Still Images Movies

You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.

Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for

background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects

and subject- and scene-based image processing.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Shoot.

zHold the camera steady as you shoot.

Two consecutive images are captured

when you press the shutter button all the

way down.

zA blinking [ ] icon indicates that the

images could not be processed.

Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent

you from obtaining the desired results.

For the best results with background defocusing, try shooting

close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the

subject and background.

There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.

To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.

Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect

(Toy Camera Effect)

Still Images Movies

This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting

(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Choose a color tone.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.

zA preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.

Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].

Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].

Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

62

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Shooting in Monochrome

Still Images Movies

Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Choose a color tone.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.

zA preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

B/W Black and white shots.

Sepia Sepia tone shots.

Blue Blue and white shots.

Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect

Still Images Movies

This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were

attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ].

2 Choose an effect level.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect

level.

zA preview is shown of how your shot will

look with the effect applied.

3 Shoot.

Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the

desired results.

63

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

4 Shoot.

zPress the shutter button. The ash res

as the camera takes the rst shot.

zThe second and third shots are now

taken, without ring the ash.

5 Have the person stay still until the

lamp blinks.

zThe person you are shooting should stay

still until the lamp blinks three times after

the third shot, which may take up to about

two seconds.

zAll the shots are combined to create a

single image.

Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as

expected.

For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination

such as street lights, and make sure the ash is raised.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes the images.

To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in steps

4 – 5 stays still.

Special Modes for Other Purposes

Shooting Starry Skies (Star)

Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)

Still Images Movies

Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially ring

the ash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without ash.

The three images are combined into a single image and processed to

make the stars more prominent.

For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (=

204).

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and

cannot be adjusted.

2 Raise the ash.

zMove the [ ] switch.

3 Secure the camera.

zMount the camera on a tripod or take

other measures to keep it still.

64

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies

(Star Nightscape)

Still Images Movies

Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in

the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and

cannot be adjusted.

2 Secure the camera.

zMount the camera on a tripod or take

other measures to keep it still and

prevent camera shake.

3 Shoot.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes the images.

For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night

Display] ► [On] (=

161) before shooting.

To adjust subject brightness, try changing the ash exposure

compensation (=

88).

To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure

compensation (=

74). However, images may not look as

expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should

stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.

To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU

(=

29) ► [ 6] tab ► [Star Portrait Settings] ► [Star Visibility]

► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under

some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in

steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.

To make stars brighter, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 6] tab ►

[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a

starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce

eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing

dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].

You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps

1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (=

57), touching [ ] to access

the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same

option or [ ].

65

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

2 Specify the duration of the shooting

session.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting

duration.

3 Secure the camera.

zMount the camera on a tripod or take

other measures to keep it still.

4 Shoot.

zPress the shutter button all the way

down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and

then shooting begins.

zDo not disturb the camera while shooting.

zTo cancel shooting, press the shutter

button all the way down again. Note that

cancellation may take up to about 30

seconds.

If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a

composite image created from the images up to that point is

saved.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes the images.

For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night

Display] ► [On] (=

161) before shooting.

Try switching to manual focus mode (=

81) to more accurately

specify the focal position before shooting.

You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps

1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (=

57), touching [ ] to access

the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same

option or [ ].

For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night

Display] ► [On] (=

161) before shooting.

To make stars brighter, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 5] tab ►

[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a

starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce

eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing

dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].

Try switching to manual focus mode (=

81) to more accurately

specify the focal position before shooting.

You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps

1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (=

57), touching [ ] to access

the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same

option or [ ].

Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)

Still Images Movies

Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in

a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,

the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about

two hours. Check the battery level in advance.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and

cannot be adjusted.

66

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

4 Check the brightness.

zPress the shutter button all the way down

to shoot a single still image.

zSwitch to Playback mode (=

103) and

check image brightness.

zTo adjust the brightness, turn the [ ] ring

on the shooting screen and change the

exposure level. Check brightness again

by taking another shot.

5 Shoot.

zPress the movie button. [Busy] is

displayed briey, and then shooting

begins.

zDo not disturb the camera while shooting.

zTo cancel shooting, press the movie

button again. Note that cancellation may

take up to about 30 seconds.

zThe camera operates in Eco mode

(=

161) while shooting.

Item Options Details

Effect Choose movie effects,

such as star trails.

Shot Interval 15 sec., 30 sec.,

1 min.

Choose the interval

between each shot.

Frame Rate , (NTSC)

, (PAL)

Choose the movie frame

rate.

Shooting Time 60 min., 90 min.,

120 min., Unlimited

Choose the length of

the recording session.

To record until the

battery runs out, choose

[Unlimited].

Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)

Still Images Movies

By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied

interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the

shooting interval and recording duration as needed.

Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check

the battery level and memory card space in advance.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”

(=

57) and choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and

cannot be adjusted.

2 Congure movie settings.

zTouch [ ].

zTouch an item, and then choose the

desired option.

3 Secure the camera.

zMount the camera on a tripod or take

other measures to keep it still.

67

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Sound is not recorded.

For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night

Display] ► [On] (=

161) before shooting.

You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU

(=

29) ► [ 5] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].

To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose

MENU (=

29) ► [ 5] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note

that these individual images are managed as a single group, and

during playback, only the rst image is displayed. To indicate that

the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left

of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (=

115), all images

in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.

Try switching to manual focus mode (=

81) to more accurately

specify the focal position before shooting.

Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] in step 2 and

use an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =

168), shooting will

stop after about 8 hours, at most.

You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps

1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (=

57), touching [ ] to access

the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same

option or [ ].

Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a

one-hour session)

Interval between Shots Frame Rate Playback Time

NTSC PAL

15 sec. 16 sec.

15 sec. 8 sec.

30 sec. 8 sec.

30 sec. 4 sec.

1 min. 4 sec.

1 min. 2 sec.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera

processes the images.

If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,

shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that

point is saved.

A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:

[], [ ], [ ], or [ ].

68

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Adjusting the Focus

Still Images Movies

Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.

1 Choose a shooting mode.

zChoose [ ] (=

64), [ ] (=

65), or

[ ] (=

66).

2 Secure the camera.

zMount the camera on a tripod or take

other measures to keep it still.

3 Frame the stars to capture.

zTouch [ ], and then touch [Rene

starfocus].

zTilt the camera so that the stars to

capture are inside the frame displayed.

4 Adjust the focus.

zPress the [ ] button. [Adjusting star

focus] is displayed, and adjustment

begins.

zAdjustment may take up to about 30

seconds. Do not move the camera until

[Adjustment completed] is displayed.

zPress the [ ] button.

5 Shoot (=

64, =

65, =

66).

The focal position may not be adjusted under the following

conditions. If so, try again from step 3.

There is a bright light source

Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky

If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.

Adjusting Colors

Still Images Movies

Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.

1 Choose a shooting mode.

zChoose [ ] (=

63), [ ] (=

64),

[ ] (=

65), or [ ] (=

66).

2 Choose color adjustment.

zPress the [ ] button, and then choose

[] in the menu (=

28).

3 Adjust the setting.

zTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction

level for B and A, and then press the [ ]

button.

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

B represents blue and A, amber.

Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [ ] mode.

Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [ ]

button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (=

78).

You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging

the bar in step 2.

69

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording

Still Images Movies

You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-

stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.

1 Lock the exposure.

zTouch [ ] to lock the exposure.

zTo unlock the exposure, touch [ ] again.

2 Adjust the exposure.

zTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the exposure,

as you watch the screen.

3 Shoot (=

69).

Recording Various Movies

Recording Movies in [ ] Mode

Still Images Movies

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

zTouch [ ], and then choose [ ].

zTo conrm your choice, touch [OK].

zBlack bars are displayed on the top and

bottom edges of the screen, and the

subject is slightly enlarged. The black

bars indicate image areas not recorded.

2 Congure the settings to suit the

movie (=

190).

3 Shoot.

zPress the movie button.

zTo stop movie recording, press the movie

button again.

You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU

(=

29) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].

Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to

switch it to [ ]) and then touching [ ][ ].

70

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Correcting Severe Camera Shake

Still Images Movies

Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.

The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and

subjects are further enlarged.

zFollow the steps in “Recording Movies

with Subjects at the Same Size Shown

before Shooting” (=

52) to choose

[High].

[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].

Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [ ]

(NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).

Sound Settings

Still Images Movies

Deactivating the Wind Filter

Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording

may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In

this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Wind

Filter] on the [ 7] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

29).

zChoose [Off] (=

29).

Disabling Auto Slow Shutter

Still Images Movies

Auto Slow Shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.

However, under low light, movies may look dark.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 7]

tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]

(=

29).

zTo restore the original setting, repeat this

process but choose [A-SLOW ON].

Auto Slow Shutter only applies to [ ] (with NTSC) or

[] (with PAL) movies.

71

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

3 Shoot (=

69).

zA bar showing the elapsed time is

displayed.

Playback Effects

2x Playback in fast motion

1x Playback at normal speed

1/2x Playback in slow motion

Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and

played again in slow motion

Sound is not recorded in these clips.

The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)

(=

49, =

49) and cannot be changed.

During [ ] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is

added to the bar showing the elapsed time.

Using the Attenuator

The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.

However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Attenuator] on the [ 7] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

zChoose an option as desired (=

29).

Recording Short Clips

Still Images Movies

Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,

slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in

Story Highlights albums (=

127).

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

zTouch [ ], and then choose [ ].

zTo conrm your choice, touch [OK].

zBlack bars displayed on the top and

bottom edges of the screen indicate

image areas not recorded.

2 Specify the shooting time and

playback effect.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTurn the [ ] ring to set the shooting time

(4 – 6 sec.).

zAfter pressing the [ ] button, set the

playback effect (=

71) by turning the

[] ring.

72

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

Recording iFrame Movies

Still Images Movies

Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or

devices.

1 Choose [ ].

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

zTouch [ ], and then choose [ ].

zTo conrm your choice, touch [OK].

zBlack bars displayed on the top and

bottom edges of the screen indicate

image areas not recorded.

2 Shoot (=

69).

iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.

The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)

(=

49, =

49) and cannot be changed.

73

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)

Still Images Movies

You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting

style.

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Customize the settings as desired

(=

74 – =

91), and then shoot.

If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the

shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are

displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed

(=

75) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark, =

87),

which may enable optimum exposure.

Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the

movie button. However, some menu (=

28) and MENU

(=

29) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie

recording.

P Mode

More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting

style

Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode

dial set to [ ] mode.

[]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure

Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes

other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode

(=

190).

74

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

AE: Auto Exposure

After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of

shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] ring (Program

Shift).

Changing the Metering Method

Still Images Movies

Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting

conditions as follows.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

Evaluative

For typical shooting conditions, including backlit

shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the

shooting conditions.

Center

Weighted

Avg.

Determines the average brightness of light across

the entire image area, calculated by treating

brightness in the central area as more important.

Spot

Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point

frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to

the AF frame (=

75).

Image Brightness (Exposure)

Adjusting Image Brightness

(Exposure Compensation)

Still Images Movies

The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop

increments, in a range of -3 to +3.

zAs you watch the screen, turn the [ ] ring

to adjust brightness.

You can also congure this setting by touching the exposure

compensation icon on the bottom of the shooting screen and then

touching or dragging the bar displayed, or by touching [–][+].

Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)

Still Images Movies

Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and

exposure separately.

1 Lock the exposure.

zAim the camera at the subject to shoot with

the exposure locked, and then touch [ ].

z[] is displayed, and the exposure is

locked.

zTo unlock AE, touch [ ] again. [ ] is no

longer displayed.

2 Compose the shot and shoot.

75

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Changing the ISO Speed

Still Images Movies

Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting

mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher

sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.

zTouch [ ], and then choose the ISO

speed (either touch [ ][ ] or turn the [ ]

ring).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have

set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.

Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image

graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera

shake in some shooting conditions.

The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces

subject and camera shake and increases the ash range.

However, shots may look grainy.

You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (=

29) ►

[5] tab ► [ISO speed] ► [ISO Speed].

Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame

Still Images Movies

1 Set the metering method to [ ].

zFollow the steps in “Changing the

Metering Method” (=

74) to choose

[ ].

2 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Spot

AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then

choose [AF Point] (=

29).

zThe Spot AE Point frame will now be

linked to the movement of the AF frame

(=

84).

Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (=

84).

76

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)

Still Images Movies

Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels

(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each

time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and

overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-

stop increments.

1 Choose [ ].

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then

choose [ ] (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

specify a value by touching or dragging

the bar on the setting screen.

AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (=

87).

Continuous shooting (=

42) is not available in this mode.

If exposure compensation is already in use (=

74), the value

specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure

level for this function.

You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing

the [ ] button when the exposure compensation screen

(=

74) is displayed.

Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [ ]

(=

41).

In [Blink Detection] mode (=

51), this function is only available

for the nal shot.

Adjusting ISO Auto Settings

Still Images Movies

When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied

in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of

three levels.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ISO

speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

29).

zChoose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the

[] button.

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose a menu item to congure, and

then choose the desired option (=

29).

Changing the Noise Reduction Level

(High ISO NR)

You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].

This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [High

ISO NR] on the [ 6] tab, and then

choose the desired option (=

29).

Not available when images are captured in RAW format

(=

90).

77

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Shadow Correct

Still Images Movies

Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Shadow Correct] on the [ 5] tab, and

then press the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose the [ ] option (=

29).

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings

For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND lter reduces light

intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three stops.

Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and aperture value.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other

measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,

you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=

52).

ND: Neutral Density

Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)

Still Images Movies

Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,

as follows.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [DR

Correction] on the [ 5] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose an option as desired (=

29).

zOnce set, the option you chose is

displayed.

Options Details Available ISO Speed

(=

75)

Automatic adjustment to prevent

washed-out highlights [AUTO], [125] – [12800]

Tone down highlights by about 200%

relative to the brightness level of [ ]. [AUTO], [250] – [6400]

ISO speed (=

75) will be adjusted to a speed within the

supported range if you have specied a value outside the

supported range indicated here.

78

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Custom White Balance

Still Images Movies

For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white

balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white

balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.

zFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural

Colors (White Balance)” (=

78) to

choose [ ] or [ ].

zAim the camera at a plain white subject,

so that the entire screen is white. Press

the [ ] button.

zThe tint of the screen changes once the

white balance data has been recorded.

Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after

recording white balance data.

You can also record white balance data on the screen above by

touching [ ].

Manually Correcting White Balance

Still Images Movies

You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of

using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-

compensating lter.

1 Congure the setting.

zFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural

Colors (White Balance)” (=

78) to

choose [ ].

zTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction

level for B and A.

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

Image Colors

Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)

Still Images Movies

By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more

natural for the scene you are shooting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for

the shooting conditions.

Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.

Shade For shooting in the shade.

Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.

Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.

Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.

Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.

Flash For shooting with the ash.

Custom For manually setting a custom white balance

(=

78).

79

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)

Still Images Movies

Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia

or black and white.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

My Colors Off

Vivid Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,

making images sharper.

Neutral Tones down contrast and color saturation for

subdued images.

Sepia Creates sepia tone images.

B/W Creates black and white images.

Positive Film

Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green,

and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural-

looking colors resembling images on positive lm.

Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.

Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.

Vivid Blue Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,

ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.

Vivid Green

Emphasizes greens in images. Makes

mountains, foliage, and other green subjects

more vivid.

Vivid Red Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red

subjects more vivid.

Custom Color

Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and

other qualities as desired (

=

80).

2 Congure advanced settings.

zTo congure more advanced settings,

press the [ ] button and adjust the

correction level (either turn the [ ] ring or

touch or drag the frame).

zTo reset the correction level, press the

[] button.

zPress the [ ] button to complete the

setting.

The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if

you switch to another white balance option (by following steps

in “Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)” (=

78)), but

correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance

data.

B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green

One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7

mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color

temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter

density)

You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=

29)

► [ 6] tab ► [WB Correction].

You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging

the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.

You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [ ] in

step 1.

On the screen in step 2, you can touch [ ] to restore the

original level and touch [ ] to return to the shooting screen.

80

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Shooting Range and Focusing

Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)

Still Images Movies

To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For

details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (=

205).

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then choose [ ] (=

28).

zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is

displayed.

If the ash res, vignetting may occur.

To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod

and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (=

41).

White balance (=

78) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.

With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone

may change. These settings may not produce the expected

results with some skin tones.

Custom Color

Still Images Movies

Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,

red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.

1 Access the setting screen.

zFollow the steps in “Changing Image

Color Tones (My Colors)” (=

79) to

choose [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch [ ][ ] to choose an item, and then

turn the [ ] ring to specify a value.

zFor stronger/more intense effects (or

darker skin tones), adjust the value to

the right, and for weaker/lighter effects

(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to

the left.

zPress the [ ] button to complete the

setting.

81

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

When you focus manually, the AF method (=

83) is [1-point

AF] and AF frame size (=

84) is [Normal], and these settings

cannot be changed.

Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (=

39) or

digital tele-converter (=

83), or when using a TV as a display

(=

170), but the magnied display will not appear.

To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to

stabilize it.

You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting

MENU (=

29) ► [ 4] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.

To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button

is pressed halfway, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 4] tab ►

[Safety MF] ► [Off].

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode

Still Images Movies

When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can

specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button

halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the

position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting

Range” (=

205).

1 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

z[] and the MF indicator are displayed.

2 Specify the general focal position.

zReferring to the on-screen MF indicator

(1, which shows the distance and focal

position) and the magnied display,

touch [ ][ ] to specify the general focal

position, and then press the [ ] button.

zTo adjust the magnication, press the

[] button.

zDuring magnied display, you can move

the focusing frame by dragging on the

screen.

3 Fine-tune the focus.

zPress the shutter button halfway or touch

[] to have the camera ne-tune the

focal position (Safety MF).

zTo cancel manual focus, touch [ ].

82

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

2 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

specify a value by touching or dragging

the bar on the setting screen.

Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (=

87).

Continuous shooting (=

42) is not available in this mode.

You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the

[] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”

(=

81).

Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [ ]

(=

41).

In [Blink Detection] mode (=

51), this function is only available

for the nal shot.

You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the

bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching

[].

Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)

Still Images Movies

Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing

easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge

detection as needed.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [MF

Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,

choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]

(=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose a menu item to congure, and

then choose the desired option (=

29).

Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.

Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)

Still Images Movies

Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the

rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther

and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your

specied focus can be set in three levels.

1 Choose [ ].

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then

choose [ ] (=

29).

83

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

1-point AF

Still Images Movies

The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable

focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (=

86).

A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot

focus when you press the shutter button halfway.

To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or

in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF

frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you

continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot

as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down

(Focus Lock).

The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter

button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (=

50) set to [On].

Digital Tele-Converter

Still Images Movies

The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or

2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster

than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the

same zoom factor.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Digital Zoom] on the [ 2] tab, and then

choose the desired option (=

29).

zThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor

is displayed on the screen.

The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom

lever all the way toward [ ] for maximum telephoto, and when

you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following

step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (=

39).

Choosing the AF Method

Still Images Movies

Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and choose the desired option

(=

28).

You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=

29)

► [ 3] tab ► [AF method].

84

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

On the screen in step 2, you can also move the AF frame by

touching the screen, restore the AF frame to the original position

by touching [ ], or exit the setting by touching [ ].

+Tracking

Still Images Movies

Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative

metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).

After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed

around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main

subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other

detected faces.

When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving

subjects, within a certain range.

After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are

displayed around faces in focus.

When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are

displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button

halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that

the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio

(=

47) setting.

If no faces are detected in Servo AF (=

85) mode, the AF

frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the

shutter button halfway.

Examples of faces that cannot be detected:

Subjects that are distant or extremely close

Subjects that are dark or light

Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden

The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.

No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you

press the shutter button halfway.

Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)

Still Images Movies

When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF

method to [1-point AF].

1 Move the AF frame.

zTouch the screen. An AF frame is

displayed in orange where you touched

(Touch AF).

zTo return the AF frame to the original

position in the center, press the [ ]

button.

2 Resize the AF frame.

zTo reduce the AF frame size, turn the

[] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the

original size.

3 Finish the setup process.

zPress the [ ] button.

AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital

zoom (=

39) or digital tele-converter (=

83), and in manual

focus mode (=

81).

You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame

(=

75).

You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the

[] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab

(=

29).

85

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous

shooting (=

42), specify Servo AF with [AF method] set to

[1-point AF].

You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=

29)

► [ 3] tab ► [AF operation].

Changing the Focus Setting

Still Images Movies

You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on

subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.

Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the

shutter button halfway.

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and

then choose [Off] (=

29).

On

Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because

the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the

shutter button halfway.

Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus

constantly.

Shooting with Servo AF

Still Images Movies

This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the

camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long

as you press the shutter button halfway.

1 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ONE

SHOT] in the menu, and then choose

[SERVO].

2 Focus.

zThe focus and exposure are maintained

where the blue AF frame is displayed

while you are pressing the shutter button

halfway.

Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.

In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames

may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.

In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the

specied AF method.

Continuous shooting (=

42) is slower in Servo AF mode.

If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and

aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter

button, and then press it halfway again.

AF lock shooting is not available.

[AF-Point Zoom] on the [ 3] tab (=

29) is not available.

Not available when using the self-timer (=

40).

Using the self-timer (=

40) will restrict the AF mode to [ONE

SHOT].

86

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered

person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other

registered people have been detected. However, their names will

be recorded in the still images (=

43).

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)

Still Images Movies

You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus

on.

1 Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]

(=

83).

2 Choose a person’s face or another

subject to focus on.

zTouch the subject or person on the

screen.

zWhen the subject is detected, the camera

beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is

maintained even if the subject moves.

zTo cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].

3 Shoot.

zPress the shutter button halfway. After

the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a

green [ ].

zPress the shutter button all the way down

to shoot.

Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)

Still Images Movies

You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.

1 Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]

(=

83).

2 Assign [ ] to the movie button

(=

99).

3 Enter Face Select mode.

zAim the camera at the person’s face and

press the movie button.

zAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a

face frame [ ] is displayed around the

face detected as the main subject.

zEven if the subject moves, the face frame

[] follows the subject within a certain

range.

zIf a face is not detected, [ ] is not

displayed.

4 Choose the face to focus on.

zTo switch the face frame [ ] to another

detected face, press the movie button.

zOnce you cycle through all detected

faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,

followed by the selected AF method

screen.

5 Shoot.

zPress the shutter button halfway. After the

camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].

zPress the shutter button all the way down

to shoot.

87

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Flash

Changing the Flash Mode

Still Images Movies

You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details

on the ash range, see “Camera” (=

204).

1 Raise the ash.

zMove the [ ] switch.

2 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and choose the desired option.

zThe option you congured is now

displayed.

[] is not displayed in the menu when the ash is lowered, even

if you press the [ ] button. Move the [ ] switch to raise the ash,

then congure the setting.

If the ash res, vignetting may occur.

Auto

Fires automatically in low-light conditions.

On

Fires for each shot.

If the camera shoots when you touch the screen, either touch [ ]

and choose [ ] (=

42) or choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 2]

tab ► [Touch Shutter] ► [Disable].

Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or

move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between

subjects and the background.

Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (=

80), the camera will

revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to

focus.

If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when

registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in

the still images (=

43). However, a name will be displayed if

the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected

with Face ID.

Shooting with the AF Lock

Still Images Movies

The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will

not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.

1 Lock the focus.

zWith the shutter button pressed halfway,

press the [ ] button.

zThe focus is now locked, and [ ] and the

MF indicator are displayed.

zTo unlock the focus, release the shutter

button and touch

[ ]

.

2 Compose the shot and shoot.

Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (=

42).

88

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation

Still Images Movies

Just as with regular exposure compensation (=

74), you can adjust the

ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.

zRaise the ash, press the [ ] button, and

choose [ ] in the menu. Turn the [ ] ring

to choose the compensation level, and

then press the [ ] button.

When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically

adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to

reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.

However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter

speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (=

29) and

choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].

You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by

accessing MENU (=

29) and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash

Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].

You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen (=

29)

as follows.

Press the [ ] button when the ash is up, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then press the [ ] button.

Slow Synchro

Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a

slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.

In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other

measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,

you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other

means to secure the camera (=

52).

In [ ] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main

subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.

Off

For shooting without the ash.

If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter

button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,

mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it

still.

You can also congure this setting by touching [ ], touching an

option, and then touching it again.

89

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Changing the Flash Timing

Still Images Movies

Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press

the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose

the desired option (=

29).

1st-

curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.

2nd-

curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.

Shooting with the FE Lock

Still Images Movies

Just as with the AE lock (=

74), you can lock the exposure for ash

shots.

1 Raise the ash and set it to [ ]

(=

87).

2 Lock the ash exposure.

zAim the camera at the subject to shoot

with the exposure locked, and then touch

[ ].

zThe ash res, and when [ ] is displayed,

the ash output level is retained.

zTo unlock FE, touch [ ] again. [ ] is no

longer displayed.

3 Compose the shot and shoot.

zAfter one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is

no longer displayed.

FE: Flash Exposure

90

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Capturing in RAW Format

The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.

JPEG Images

Processed in the camera for optimal image quality

and compressed to reduce le size. However, the

compression process is irreversible, and images

cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed

state. Image processing may also cause some loss of

image quality.

RAW Images

“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially

no loss of image quality from the camera’s image

processing. The data cannot be used in this state for

viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst use

the software (Digital Photo Professional, =

173)

to convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF les.

Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image

quality.

zPress the [ ] button, and then choose

[] in the menu (=

28).

zTo capture in RAW format only, choose

the [ ] option.

zTo capture images in both JPEG and

RAW format simultaneously, choose the

JPEG image quality, and then press the

[] button. A [ ] mark is displayed

next to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow

the same steps and remove the [ ] mark

next to [RAW].

When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images

recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated

software (=

173).

Digital zoom (=

39) is not available when capturing images

in RAW format. Additionally, noise reduction level (=

76),

dynamic range correction (=

77), shadow correction (=

77),

and My Colors (=

79) cannot be congured.

Other Settings

Changing Image Quality

Still Images Movies

Choose from 8 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression

(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format

(=

90). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can t on a

memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (=

205).

zFollow the steps in “Changing Image

Quality” (=

48) to adjust the settings.

[] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending

on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of

pixels), [ ] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images

have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card.

91

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

For details on the relationship between the number of recording

pixels and the number of shots that will t on a card, see “Number

of Shots per Memory Card” (=

205).

The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for

RAW images is .CR2.

Using the Menu

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

zTo capture in RAW format at the same

time, choose [ ] under [RAW]. Note that

only JPEG images are captured when [−]

is selected.

zIn [JPEG], choose the number of pixels

and compression ratio. Note that only

RAW images are captured when [−] is

selected.

zWhen nished, press the [ ] button to

return to the menu screen.

[RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].

Changing the IS Mode Settings

Still Images Movies

You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.

zFollow the steps in “Deactivating Image

Stabilization” (=

52) to choose [Shoot

Only].

92

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)

Still Images Movies

Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera

automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.

For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (=

204).

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the shutter speed.

zTurn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed.

Shutter Speed (Sec.) Available ISO Speed (=

75)

30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]

1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]

In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a

delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes

images to reduce noise.

When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set

[IS Mode] to [Off] (=

52).

Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter

button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been

obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is

displayed in white, or use safety shift (=

93).

[]: Time value

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and

customize the camera for your shooting style

Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the

respective mode.

93

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture

Values ([M] Mode)

Still Images Movies

Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed

and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.

For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”

(=

204).

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch [ ] (1), choose the shutter speed

(2), aperture value (3), or [ ] (4),

and then turn the [ ] ring to specify a

value.

zWhen the ISO speed is xed, an

exposure level mark (6) based on

your specied values is shown on the

exposure level indicator for comparison

to the standard exposure level (5). The

exposure level mark is shown as [ ] or

[] when the difference from standard

exposure exceeds 3 stops.

zThe ISO speed is determined and screen

brightness changes when you press

the shutter button halfway after setting

the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard

exposure cannot be obtained with your

specied shutter speed and aperture

value, the ISO speed is displayed in

orange.

(2) (3)

(5)

(

)

(4)

Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)

Still Images Movies

Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera

automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.

For details on available aperture values, see “Camera” (=

204).

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the aperture value.

zTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture

value.

Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter

button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been

obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is

displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).

[]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the

diaphragm in the lens)

In [ ] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and set

[Safety Shift] on the [ 6] tab to [On] (=

29) to have the

camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value

when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the

optimum exposure.

However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.

94

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)

With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the

shutter button.

1 Specify bulb exposure.

zSet the shutter speed to [BULB], following

steps 1 – 3 in “Specic Shutter Speeds

and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”

(=

93).

2 Shoot.

zShots are exposed for as long as you

hold the shutter button all the way down.

The elapsed exposure time is displayed

during exposure.

Maximum continuous shooting time with this feature is 4 min.

16 sec.

Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it

still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image

stabilization (=

52).

When [Touch Shutter] is set to [On], shooting is started by

touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be

careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.

Shutter Speed (Sec.) Available ISO Speed (=

75)

[BULB], 30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]

1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]

After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure

level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.

Screen brightness may change depending on your specied

shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness

remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [ ].

[]: Manual

Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied

metering method (=

74).

The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to

[AUTO].

Adjust exposure by touching [ ] a few times to choose the

exposure compensation bar and then turning the [ ] ring.

Touch [ ] to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness changes

accordingly.

95

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Recording Movies at Specic Shutter

Speeds and Aperture Values

Still Images Movies

Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, exposure, and ISO

speed.

For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”

(=

204), and for available ISO speeds, see “Changing the ISO Speed”

(=

75).

1 Enter [ ] mode.

zSet the mode dial to [ ].

zTouch [ ], and then choose [ ].

zTo conrm your choice, touch [OK].

2 Congure the settings.

zTouch [ ] (1), choose an item to

congure (2), and then turn the [ ] ring to

specify a value.

3 Shoot.

zPress the movie button.

zDuring recording, you can switch

the setting to congure by touching

[] repeatedly and adjust the value by

turning the [ ] ring.

Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when

recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be

recorded.

(

)

Adjusting the Flash Output

Still Images Movies

Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.

1 Specify the ash mode.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash

Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then set

[Flash Mode] to [Manual].

2 Congure the setting.

zRaise the ash, press the [ ] button, and

choose [ ] in the menu. Turn the [ ] ring

to choose the ash output level, and then

press the [ ] button.

zOnce the setting is complete, the ash

output level is displayed.

[]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:

Maximum

You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (=

29)

and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].

You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (=

29) as

follows.

Press the [ ] button when the ash is up, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then press the [ ] button.

96

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Customizing Controls and Display

Adjusting Settings while Switching Control

Ring Functions

Still Images Movies

You can touch the screen to switch the function (ISO speed, exposure

compensation, shutter speed, and aperture value) congured with the

control ring, and quickly adjust the setting by turning the ring.

zTouch [ ] to switch to another item, and

then turn the [ ] ring to set a value.

Available setting items vary by shooting mode.

Tv

Av

+/–

ISO

Av

+/–

ISO

Tv

+/–

ISO

+/–

ISO

+/–: exposure compensation (=

74); ISO: ISO speed (=

75); Tv:

shutter speed (=

92); Av: aperture value (=

93).

You can also adjust the exposure when ISO speed is set to

[AUTO] by touching [ ] a few times, choosing the exposure

compensation bar, and then turning the [ ] ring.

When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on

your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for

comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level

mark is shown as [ ] or [ ] when the difference from standard

exposure exceeds 3 stops.

You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the

shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained

with your specied shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO

speed is displayed in orange.

Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to

switch it to [ ]) and then touching [ ] or [ ].

97

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Functions Assignable to the Control Ring

Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting

mode.

Item

Shooting Mode

Av –––

Tv

Av Tv +/–

Adjust the ISO speed (=

75)

Correct the exposure (=

74)

Correct white balance (=

78)

Perform step zooming (=

40)

Congure dynamic range (=

77)

Enable or disable shadow correction

(=

77)

Adjust the aspect ratio (=

47)

Assign functions as desired (=

98)

+/–: exposure compensation (=

74); Tv: shutter speed (=

92);

Av: aperture value (=

93).

The [ ] ring can be used for step zooming (=

40) in [ ]

or [ ] mode.

Changing Control Ring Settings

Still Images Movies

Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an

enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.

1 Choose a function to assign to the

[ ] ring.

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Control Ring Settings] on the [ 2] tab.

Set [Switch with ] to [Disable].

zChoose [Set Function].

2 Congure the assigned function.

zTouch an option, and then press the [ ]

button.

98

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Customizing Display Information

Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button

on the shooting screen. You can also customize what information is

displayed.

1 Access the setting screen.

zOn the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/

toggle settings] in [Shooting information

display], and then press the [ ] button

(=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch any screen that you prefer not

to display, to remove the [ ] mark.

Touching it again will add the [ ] mark,

which indicates that it is included in

display.

zTo return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown

at left for reference.

At least one option must be selected.

Assigning Functions to the Control Ring

Still Images Movies

Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode.

1 Choose [ ].

zFollowing step 1 in “Changing Control

Ring Settings” (=

97), choose [ ] and

press the [ ] button.

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch a shooting mode to choose it.

zTurn the [ ] ring to choose a function to

assign to the control ring (1).

zPress the [ ] button to return to the

shooting screen.

(

)

99

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Customizing the Information Displayed

zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing

Display Information” (=

98) to choose

[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],

and then press the [ ] button.

zTouch information to display, to add a [ ]

mark.

zTo see an example of display, press the

[] button to return to the [Screen

info/ toggle settings] screen.

For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab ► [Shooting

information display] ► [Grid display].

Assigning Functions to the Movie Button

Still Images Movies

You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the movie

button.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Set

button] on the [ 2] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zTouch an option to assign, and then press

the [ ] button.

To restore the default setting to the movie button, choose [ ].

Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in

the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.

With [ ], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the

movie button in [1-point AF] mode (=

83, =

84).

With [ ] or [ ], each press of the movie button records white

balance data (=

78), and the white balance setting changes to

[] or [ ].

When the [ ] function is used, each press of the movie button

adjusts and locks the focus, and [ ] is displayed on the screen.

Pressing the movie button when the [ ] function is used

deactivates screen display. To restore the display, do any of the

following.

Press any button other than the power button

Hold the camera in another orientation

Raise or lower the ash

You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even

if you assign a function to the movie button.

You can also congure settings by touching a desired option and

then touching it again or touching [ ].

100

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Customizing the Quick Set Menu

Still Images Movies

The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.

Choosing Items to Include in the Menu

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Quick

setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,

and then press the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Choose icons to include in the

menu.

zTouch icons to include in the Quick Set

menu. Selected icons are marked with

a [ ].

zSelected items (labeled with a [ ]) will

be included in display.

zItems without a [ ] can be congured on

the [ ] tab of the menu screen.

3 Complete the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

touch [OK].

Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.

The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the

[] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.

Rearranging Menu Items

1 Access the setting screen.

zOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing

Items to Include in the Menu” (=

100),

press the [ ] button.

zDrag an icon to move it to a new position.

2 Complete the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

touch [OK].

101

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],

change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting

details are not applied in other shooting modes.

To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default

values, turn the mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All]

(=

166).

Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items

(My Menu)

Still Images Movies

You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]

tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly

from a single screen.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [My

Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then

press the [ ] button (=

29).

2 Congure the setting.

zChoose [Select items] and press the [ ]

button.

zTouch up to six menu items to save.

z[] is displayed.

zTo cancel saving, touch an item. [ ] is no

longer displayed.

zPress the [ ] button.

Saving Shooting Settings

Still Images Movies

Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function

settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode

dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch

shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be

retained this way.

Settings That Can Be Saved

Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])

Items set in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (=

74 – =

93)

Shooting menu settings

Zoom positions

Manual focus positions (=

81)

My Menu settings (=

101)

1 Enter a shooting mode with settings

you want to save, and change the

settings as desired.

2 Congure the setting.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Save

Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press

the [ ] button.

3 Save the settings.

zTouch [OK].

102

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

3 Rearrange menu items, as needed.

zChoose [Sort] and press the [ ] button.

zDrag items to change the display order.

zPress the [ ] button.

Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may

not be available in some shooting modes.

To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the

[] button in Shooting mode, set [Set default view] to [Yes].

103

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Viewing

Still Images Movies

After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as

follows.

1 Enter Playback mode.

zPress the [ ] button.

zYour last shot is displayed.

2 Choose images.

zTo view the next image, drag right to

left across the screen, and to view the

previous image, drag left to right.

zYou can also view the next image by

touching the right edge of the screen (1).

In this case, [ ] is displayed. Similarly,

you can view the previous image by

touching the left edge of the screen (2),

and in this case, [ ] is displayed.

zTo access this screen (Scroll Display

mode), quickly drag left or right

repeatedly.

zIn this mode, drag left or right to browse

through images.

zTouching the central image will restore

single-image display.

zTo browse images grouped by shooting

date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag

up or down.

Playback Mode

Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit

them in many ways

To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]

button to enter Playback mode.

It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were

renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other

cameras.

104

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the

shutter button halfway.

To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 5]

tab ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].

To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback

mode, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 5] tab ► [Resume] ►

[Last shot].

To change the transition shown between images, access MENU

(=

29) and choose your desired effect on the [ 5] tab ►

[Transition Effect].

Touching the volume indicator displays the volume panel. You can

adjust the volume by touching [ ][ ].

zMovies are identied by a [ ] icon. To

play movies, go to step 3.

3 Play movies.

zTo start playback, press the [ ] button,

choose [ ], and then press the [ ]

button again.

4 Adjust the volume.

zQuickly drag up or down to adjust the

volume.

zTo adjust the volume when the volume

indicator (1) is no longer displayed,

quickly drag up or down across the

screen.

5 Pause playback.

zTo pause or resume playback, press the

[] button.

zTo pause playback, touch the screen.

The movie control panel is displayed. To

resume playback, touch [ ].

zAfter the movie is nished, [ ] is

displayed.

(

105

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)

Still Images Movies

Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed

information display (=

105).

Histogram

Still Images Movies

zThe graph in detailed information display

(=

105) is a histogram showing the

distribution of brightness in the image.

The horizontal axis represents the degree

of brightness, and the vertical axis, how

much of the image is at each level of

brightness. Viewing the histogram is a

way to check exposure.

zThe histogram can also be accessed

while shooting (=

99, =

188).

RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display

Still Images Movies

zThe RGB histogram shows the distribution

of shades of red, green, and blue in an

image. The horizontal axis represents R,

G, or B brightness, and the vertical axis,

how much of the image is at that level of

brightness. Viewing this histogram enables

you to check image color characteristics.

zUsing a smartphone connected to the

camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images

on the camera, adding information such

as latitude, longitude, and elevation

(=

155). You can review this information

in the GPS information display.

zLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC

(shooting date and time) are listed from

top to bottom.

Switching Display Modes

Still Images Movies

Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or

to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see

“Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (=

189).

No Information Display

Simple Information Display

Detailed Information Display

RGB Histogram, GPS Information

Display

Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is

connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.

106

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting

Still Images (Digest Movies)

Still Images Movies

View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=

35) on a

day of still image shooting as follows.

1 Choose an image.

zStill images shot in [ ] mode are

labeled with [ ] icon.

zChoose a still image labeled with [ ].

2 Play the digest movie.

zTouch [ ], and then touch [OK].

zThe movie recorded automatically on the

day of still image shooting is played back,

from the beginning.

After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are

using the camera with information display deactivated (=

105).

Viewing by Date

Digest movies can be viewed by date.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [List/

Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab,

and then touch a date (=

29).

[—] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available

on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.

UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as

Greenwich Mean Time

GPS information display is not available for images that lack this

information.

You can also switch between the RGB histogram and GPS

information display by dragging the lower half of the screen

upward or downward in detailed information display.

Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative

Shot Mode (Creative Shot Movies)

Still Images Movies

Play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ] mode (=

55).

1 Choose a movie.

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [ 2]

tab (=

29).

2 Play the movie.

zTouch a movie to play it.

107

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Browsing and Filtering Images

Navigating through Images in an Index

Still Images Movies

By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images

you are looking for.

1 Display images in an index.

zMove the zoom lever toward [ ] to

display images in an index. Moving the

lever again will increase the number of

images shown.

zTo display fewer images, move the zoom

lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are

shown each time you move the lever.

2 Choose an image.

zDrag up or down on the screen to scroll

through displayed images.

zTouch an image to choose it, and touch it

again to view it in single-image display.

zYou can also drag left or right across the

screen to move the orange frame, and

then hold the zoom lever toward [ ] to

view an image in single-image display.

Checking People Detected in Face ID

Still Images Movies

If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (=

105),

the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (=

43)

will be displayed.

zPress the [ ] button several times to

enter simple information display, and then

choose an image by dragging left or right

on the screen.

zNames will be displayed on detected

people.

If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using

Face ID, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 3] tab ► [Face ID Info]

► [Name Display] ► [Off].

108

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

1 Choose the rst condition.

zIn single-image display, press the [ ]

button, choose [ ] in the menu, press

the [ ] button again, and choose a

condition.

zWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can

view only images matching this condition

by touching [ ][ ] or turning the [ ]

ring. To perform an action for all of these

images together, press the [ ] button

and go to step 3.

2 Choose the second condition and

view the ltered images.

zWhen you have selected [ ] or [ ] as

the rst condition, choose the second by

touching [ ][ ], and then turn the [ ] ring

to view only matching images.

zTo switch to ltered image display, press

the [ ] button and go to step 3.

zWhen you have selected [ ] as the

rst condition, press the [ ] button and

choose a person on the next screen.

3 View the ltered images.

zImages matching your conditions are

displayed in yellow frames. To view only

these images, drag left or right across the

screen.

zTo cancel ltered display, press the [ ]

button, choose [ ] in the menu, and

then press the [ ] button.

When the camera has found no corresponding images for some

conditions, those conditions will not be available.

Touch-Screen Operations

zPinch in to switch from single-image

display to index display.

zTo view more thumbnails per screen,

pinch in again.

zDrag up or down on the screen to scroll

through displayed images.

zTo view fewer thumbnails per screen,

spread your ngers apart.

zTouch an image to choose it, and touch it

again to view it in single-image display.

Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions

Still Images Movies

Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering

image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect

(=

113) or delete (=

115) these images all at once.

Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (=

118).

Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specic date.

People Displays images with detected faces.

Still image/

Movie

Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ ]

mode (=

35).

Name Displays images of a registered person (=

44).

109

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Using the Control Ring to Jump between

Images

Still Images Movies

Use the control ring to nd and jump between desired images quickly by

ltering image display according to your specied conditions.

Jump to Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites

(=

118).

Jump Shot Date Jumps to the rst image in each group of

images that were shot on the same date.

Single image Jumps by 1 image at a time.

Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time.

Jump 100 Images Jumps by 100 images at a time.

1 Choose a condition.

zChoose a condition (or jump method)

by pressing the [ ] button and

choosing [Image jump with ] on the

[5] tab.

2 View images matching your

specied condition, or jump by the

specied amount.

zIn single-image display, turn the [ ]

ring to view only images matching the

condition or jump by the specied number

of images forward or back.

To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in

step 3.

Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include

“Navigating through Images in an Index” (=

107), “Magnifying

Images” (=

112), and “Viewing Slideshows” (=

113). You can

also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing

[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (=

113) or

[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”

(=

116), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (=

179), or

“Adding Images to a Photobook” (=

181).

If you edit images and save them as new images (=

121 –

=

126), a message is displayed, and the images that were

found are no longer shown.

After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your

conditions by touching a condition again.

110

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

3 View images in the group individually.

zDragging images left or right will display

only images in the group.

zTo cancel group playback, press the [ ]

button, choose [ ] in the menu, and

press the [ ] button again (=

28).

During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images

quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (=

107) and

magnify them “Magnifying Images” (=

112). You can apply

your actions to all images in the group at once by specifying

[Protect All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (=

113),

or by specifying [Select All Images] in “Erasing Multiple Images

at Once” (=

116), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)”

(=

179), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (=

181).

To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single

still images, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 5] tab ► [Group

Images] ► [Off] (=

29). However, grouped images cannot be

ungrouped during individual playback.

In [ ] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying

a Variety of Images from Each Shot” (=

55) is only shown

immediately after you shoot.

You can also view group images individually by touching [ ]

on the screen in steps 1 and 2.

Touch-Screen Operations

zYou can also jump to the previous or next

image according to your jump method

chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control

Ring to Jump between Images” (=

109)

by dragging left or right with two ngers.

Viewing Individual Images in a Group

Still Images Movies

Images shot continuously (=

42), images shot in [ ] mode (=

55),

and individual still images saved as source data in [ ] mode (=

66)

are grouped, and only the rst image is displayed. However, you can also

view the images individually.

1 Choose a grouped image.

zBrowse images by dragging left or right

until you nd a desired image labeled

[ ].

2 Choose [ ].

zPress the [ ] button, and then choose

[] in the menu (=

28).

111

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Erasing Names

zOn the screen displayed in step 3 in

“Changing Names” (=

111), touch

[Erase].

zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].

Editing Face ID Information

If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it

or erase it.

However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face

ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been

erased.

Changing Names

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Face ID Info] on the [ 3] tab (=

29).

zChoose [Edit ID Info] and press the [ ]

button.

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

zTo choose the name you want to

overwrite, touch that person’s face.

3 Choose the editing option.

zTouch [Overwrite].

4 Choose the name of the person to

overwrite with.

zTouch the name of the person to use for

overwriting.

You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an

image on the screen in step 2, touching [ ] to display the

orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.

112

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Touch-Screen Operations

zSpread your ngers apart (pinch out) to

zoom in.

zYou can magnify images up to about 10x

by repeating this action.

zTo move the display position, drag across

the screen.

zPinch in to zoom out.

zTouch [ ] to restore single-image

display.

Image Viewing Options

Magnifying Images

Still Images Movies

1 Magnify an image.

zMoving the zoom lever toward [ ] will

zoom in and magnify the image. You

can magnify images up to about 10x by

continuing to hold the zoom lever.

zThe approximate position of the displayed

area (1) is shown for reference.

zTo zoom out, move the zoom lever

toward [ ]. You can return to single-

image display by continuing to hold it.

2 Move the display position and

switch images as needed.

zTo move the display position, drag across

the screen.

zPress the [ ] button to restore

single-image display.

zTo switch to other images while zoomed,

turn the [ ] ring.

You can check the focus when [ ] is displayed by pressing

the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).

When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button

repeatedly to switch to other positions.

(

)

113

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Protecting Images

Still Images Movies

Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (=

115).

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and then choose [ ]. [ ] is

displayed.

zTo cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [ ]

is no longer displayed.

Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format

the card (=

160).

Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure

function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.

Using the Menu

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (=

29).

2 Choose a selection method.

zChoose an option as desired (=

29).

zTo return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

Viewing Slideshows

Still Images Movies

Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab

(=

29).

zTouch [Start].

zThe slideshow will start after [Loading

image] is displayed for a few seconds.

zPress the [ ] button to stop the

slideshow.

The camera’s power-saving functions (=

26) are deactivated

during slideshows.

To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.

You can congure slideshow repetition, the display time per

image, and the transition between images on the screen

accessed by touching [Set up] (=

29).

You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.

Slideshows can also be started by using Touch Actions (=

119).

114

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Selecting a Range

1 Choose [Select Range].

zFollowing the procedure in “Using the

Menu” (=

113), choose [Select Range]

and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose a starting image.

zPress the [ ] button.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

3 Choose an ending image.

zTouch the bounded area to activate [Last

image], and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

zImages before the rst image cannot be

selected as the last image.

Choosing Images Individually

1 Choose [Select].

zFollowing the procedure in “Using the

Menu” (=

113), choose [Select] and

press the [ ] button.

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Once you press the [ ]

button, [ ] is displayed.

zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

zRepeat this process to specify other

images.

3 Protect the image.

zPress the [ ] button. A conrmation

message is displayed.

zTouch [OK].

Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or

turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.

You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in

step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching

[].

115

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Erasing Images

Still Images Movies

You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful

when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,

protected images (=

113) cannot be erased.

1 Choose an image to erase.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

2 Erase the image.

zPress the [ ] button, and then choose

[] in the menu (=

28).

zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, touch [Erase].

zThe current image is now erased.

zTo cancel erasure, touch [Cancel].

For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, touching

[ Erase] while the image is displayed gives you the option of

choosing [Erase ], [Erase ], or [Erase ].

Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (=

119).

4 Protect the images.

zTouch [Protect].

You can also choose images on the screens in steps 2 and 3 by

turning the [ ] ring.

To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in

step 4.

Protecting All Images at Once

1 Choose [Protect All Images].

zFollowing the procedure in “Using the

Menu” (=

113), choose [Protect All

Images] and press the [ ] button.

2 Protect the images.

zTouch [OK].

Clearing All Protection at Once

You can clear protection from all images at once.

To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting

All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.

116

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Choosing Images Individually

1 Choose [Select].

zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

116), choose

[Select] and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left

or right to browse. Once you touch the

screen, [ ] is displayed.

zTo cancel selection, touch the screen

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

zRepeat this process to specify other

images.

3 Erase the images.

zPress the [ ] button. A conrmation

message is displayed.

zTouch [OK].

Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will

erase both versions.

Erasing Multiple Images at Once

You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when

erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected

images (=

113) cannot be erased.

Choosing a Selection Method

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab

(=

29).

2 Choose a selection method.

zChoose the selection method, and then

press the [ ] button.

zTo return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

zTouch [ ] to return to the menu

screen.

117

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Rotating Images

Still Images Movies

Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.

1 Choose [ ].

zPress the [ ] button, and then choose

[] in the menu (=

28).

2 Rotate the image.

zEach time you drag an option, the image

is rotated 90° in that direction. Press the

[] button to complete the setting.

Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]

(=

118).

Using the Menu

1 Choose [Rotate].

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (=

29).

Selecting a Range

1 Choose [Select Range].

zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

116), choose

[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose images.

zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”

(=

114) to specify images.

3 Erase the images.

zTouch [Erase].

Specifying All Images at Once

1 Choose [Select All Images].

zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

116), choose

[Select All Images] and press the [ ]

button.

2 Erase the images.

zTouch [OK].

118

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Tagging Images as Favorites

Still Images Movies

You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a

category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to

all of those images.

“Viewing” (=

103), “Viewing Slideshows” (=

113), “Protecting

Images” (=

113), “Erasing Images” (=

115), “Adding Images to

the Print List (DPOF)” (=

179), “Adding Images to a Photobook”

(=

181)

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and then choose [ ]. [ ] is

displayed.

zTo untag the image, repeat this process

and choose [OFF], and then press the

[] button.

Using the Menu

1 Choose [Favorites].

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Favorites] on the [ 1] tab (=

29).

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Once you press the [ ]

button, [ ] is displayed.

zTo untag the image, press the [ ] button

again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

zRepeat this process to choose additional

images.

2 Rotate the image.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

zThe image is rotated 90° each time you

press the [ ] button.

zTo return to the menu screen, press the

[] button.

On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate

images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.

Deactivating Auto Rotation

Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates

images based on the current camera orientation.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Auto

Rotate] on the [ 5] tab, and then

choose [Off] (=

29).

Images cannot be rotated (=

117) when you set [Auto Rotate]

to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in

the original orientation.

119

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Convenient Control: Touch Actions

Still Images Movies

You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to

four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.

Using Touch Actions Functions

zDrag across the screen as shown.

zThe function assigned to [ ] is now

activated.

zSimilarly, you can also activate functions

assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by

dragging across the screen.

zCustomize functions assigned to Touch

Actions as desired.

3 Finish the setup process.

zPress the [ ] button. A conrmation

message is displayed.

zTouch [OK].

Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting

mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in

step 3.

Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when

creating albums (=

127).

Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions

(=

119).

To specify multiple images at once, move the zoom lever toward

[] for index display, and then touch images to choose them.

120

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Assignable Functions

Slideshow Start a slideshow.

Erase Erase an image.

Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.

Rotate Rotate an image.

Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.

Next Favorite Switch to displaying the next image tagged as

a favorite.

Previous Favorite Switch to displaying the previous image tagged

as a favorite.

Next Date Switch to displaying the rst image with the next

shooting date.

Previous Date Switch to displaying the rst image with the

previous shooting date.

To Camera

Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.

For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”

(=

131).

To Smartphone

To Computer

To Printer

To Web Service

Changing Touch Actions Functions

Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging

patterns to them as desired.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, and then

choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ 6]

tab (=

29).

2 Assign a function to a Touch Action.

zChoose a dragging pattern, and then

press the [ ] button.

zChoose a function to assign.

121

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

3 Review the new image.

zTouch [Yes].

zThe saved image is now displayed.

Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting

of [ ].

RAW images cannot be edited.

To cancel resizing in step 1, choose [ ].

Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.

Using the Menu

1 Choose [Resize].

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (=

29).

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

3 Choose an image size.

zChoose a size, and then press the [ ]

button.

zFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Changing Image

Color Tones (My Colors)” (=

123).

Editing Still Images

Image editing (=

121 – =

124) is only available when the

memory card has sufcient free space.

When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch

[] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.

When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch

[] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.

Resizing Images

Still Images Movies

Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.

1 Choose an image size.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in

the menu, and choose an image size

(=

28).

zTouch [ ] or [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

2 Save the new image.

zTouch [OK].

zThe image is now saved as a new le.

122

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting

of [ ] or resized to [ ] (=

121).

RAW images cannot be edited.

Cropped images cannot be cropped again.

Cropped images cannot be resized.

Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than

uncropped images.

While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,

move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.

Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [ ]

button, choosing [ 3] tab ► [Cropping], pressing the [ ]

button, choosing an image, and pressing the [ ] button again.

If you crop still images shot using Face ID (=

43), only the

names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.

You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (=

112) on the

screen.

Cropping

Still Images Movies

You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.

1 Access the setting screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the

menu, and then press the [ ] button

(=

28).

2 Resize, move, and adjust the aspect

ratio of the cropping frame.

zTo resize the frame, move the zoom

lever.

zTo move the frame, drag on the screen.

zTo change the frame orientation, touch

[].

zTo change the frame aspect ratio, touch

[]. To switch between aspect ratios

([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]), press the

[] button repeatedly.

3 Preview the cropped image.

zTouch [ ].

zTo switch display between the cropped

image and the cropping frame, press the

[] button repeatedly.

4 Save as a new image and review.

zTouch [ ].

zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”

(=

121).

123

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be

a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the

desired color.

Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.

The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly

from the color of images shot using My Colors (=

79).

You can also congure this setting by touching an option to select

it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.

Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)

Still Images Movies

Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be

detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient

overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects

stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the

image as a separate le.

1 Choose [i-Contrast].

zPress the [ ] button, and then

choose [i-Contrast] on the [ 3] tab

(=

29).

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)

Still Images Movies

You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a

separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color

Tones (My Colors)” (=

79).

1 Choose [My Colors].

zPress the [ ] button, and then

choose [My Colors] on the [ 3] tab

(=

29).

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

3 Choose an option.

zTouch an option, and then press the [ ]

button.

4 Save the new image.

zTouch [OK].

zThe image is now saved as a new le.

5 Review the new image.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTouch [Yes].

zThe saved image is now displayed.

124

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

3 Correct the image.

zPress the [ ] button.

zRed-eye detected by the camera is now

corrected, and frames are displayed

around corrected image areas.

zEnlarge or reduce images as needed.

Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”

(=

112).

4 Save as a new image and review.

zTouch [New File].

zThe image is now saved as a new le.

zFollow step 5 in “Changing Image Color

Tones (My Colors)” (=

123).

Some images may not be corrected accurately.

To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose

[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be

erased.

Protected images cannot be overwritten.

RAW images cannot be edited this way.

Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured

in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.

You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]

on the screen in step 4.

3 Choose an option.

zTouch [ ][ ] to choose an option, and

then press the [ ] button.

4 Save as a new image and review.

zFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Changing Image

Color Tones (My Colors)” (=

123).

For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause

images to appear grainy.

Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.

RAW images cannot be edited this way.

If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting

images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].

Correcting Red-Eye

Still Images Movies

Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the

corrected image as a separate le.

1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].

zPress the [ ] button, and then

choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the

[3] tab (=

29).

2 Choose an image.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

125

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

4 Save the edited movie.

zTouch [ ].

zTouch [New File].

zTouch [Save w/o Comp.].

zThe movie is now saved as a new le.

The following movies cannot be edited this way: digest movies

(=

35), Creative Shot movies (=

56), or albums without

background music (=

128).

To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose

[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be

erased.

If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be

available.

Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving

is in progress.

When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack

or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =

168).

Editing Movies

Still Images Movies

You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of

movies.

1 Choose [ ].

zChoose [ ] as described in steps 1 – 5 in

“Viewing” (=

103).

zThe movie editing panel and editing bar

are now displayed.

2 Specify portions to cut.

z(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is

the editing bar.

zChoose [ ] or [ ].

zTo view the portions you can cut

(identied by [ ] on the screen), drag

[]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from

[]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of

the movie by choosing [ ].

zIf you move [ ] to a position other than a

[] mark, in [ ] the portion before the

nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,

while in [ ] the portion after the nearest

[] mark on the right will be cut.

3 Review the edited movie.

zTouch [ ] to play the edited movie.

zTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.

zTo cancel editing, press the [ ]

button, and then touch [OK].

(

)

126

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Erasing Movie Chapters

Still Images Movies

Individual chapters (clips) recorded in [ ] or [ ] mode (=

35,

=

56) can be erased. Be careful when erasing clips, because they

cannot be recovered.

1 Select the clip to erase.

zPlay a short movie as described in steps

1 – 2 of “Viewing Short Movies Recorded

in Creative Shot Mode (Creative Shot

Movies)” (=

106) or “Viewing Short

Movies Created When Shooting Still

Images (Digest Movies)” (=

106), and

then press the [ ] button to access the

movie control panel.

zTouch [ ] or [ ] to choose a chapter.

2 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

zThe selected clip is played back

repeatedly.

3 Conrm erasure.

zTouch [OK].

zThe clip is erased, and the short movie is

overwritten.

[] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is

connected to a printer.

Reducing File Sizes

Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.

zOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing

Movies”, choose [ ], and then choose

[New File].

zTouch [Compress & Sav.].

Image Quality of Compressed Movies

Before Compression After Compression

[ ][ ] movies cannot be compressed.

Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you

choose [Overwrite].

127

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

1 Choose an image.

zChoose an image in single-image display.

zThemes available in step 3 will vary

depending on image shooting date and

Face ID information.

2 Access the home screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

then press the [ ] button (=

28).

zAfter [Busy] is displayed, the home

screen is displayed.

3 Preview an album.

zChoose a person or [Date] or [Event] as

the album theme, and then press the [ ]

button.

zAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few

seconds, the album is played.

4 Save the album.

zChoose [Save Album as Movie], and then

press the [ ] button.

zOnce the album is saved, [Saved] is

displayed.

5 Play the album (=

103).

Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)

Still Images Movies

You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an

album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These

images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie

of about 2 – 3 minutes.

Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.

Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a

guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and

ensure at least 1 GB of free space.

Choosing Themes for Albums

Press the [ ] button and choose the Story Highlights icon. The home

screen is displayed, and you can choose the theme for the camera to use

when selecting album elements. Note that the camera is more likely to

add images tagged as favorites (=

118) to albums.

Date

Creates an album of images shot on the same day.

Images are selected from those shot on the same day as

the image displayed before you access the home screen.

Person’s

name

Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as

albums of children as they grow up.

Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before

shooting may be selected for albums.

Images selected are those that have the same subject shot

during the same month as the image displayed before you

access the home screen.

Event

A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other

events.

Images are selected from those shot during the event

before and after the image displayed before you access

the home screen.

Custom Includes images based on your specied images, dates, or

people registered in Face ID.

128

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

zThe screen at left is displayed when you

use a new or recently formatted memory

card. Touch [OK] and wait until the seven

types of music are registered to the card,

which takes about four minutes.

zWhen using a memory card with music

already registered to it, go to step 2.

2 Create the album.

zFollow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums

(Story Highlights)” (=

127) to create an

album.

3 Congure background music

settings.

zChoose an item, press the [ ] button,

and choose an option (=

29).

4 Save the album.

zFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story

Highlights)” (=

127) to save albums.

Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added

later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or

changed.

Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited

(=

126).

If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]

on the screen in step 3.

To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio

Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.

To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],

choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [ ]

button.

Albums can include following images captured by the camera.

Still images

Digest movies (=

35), except compressed movies

Short movie clips (=

71) of two seconds or longer, or

Creative Shot movies (=

56), except compressed movies

Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the

memory card.

You can also access the Story Highlights home screen by

choosing MENU (=

29) ► [ 2] tab ► [ Story Highlights].

To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to

jump to the previous chapter, drag right.

You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change

Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the

album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview

Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after dragging left or right to

choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.

To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story

Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, and touch a listed

album.

Adding Background Music to Albums

Still Images Movies

Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album

playback.

1 Register background music to a

memory card.

zFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums

(Story Highlights)” (=

127), choose

[Music Settings] and press the [ ]

button.

129

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

5 Choose a color effect.

zOn the screen in step 4, choose [Change

Color Effect].

zDrag left or right to choose a color effect,

and then press the [ ] button.

6 Save the album.

zFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story

Highlights)” (=

127) to save albums.

You can specify up to 40 les (or 10 movie les) after choosing

[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,

[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To

use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The

previous stills, clips, or Creative Shot movies are labeled with

[], and multiple images are displayed.

Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].

The color effect may not be applied to some images.

Creating Your Own Albums

Still Images Movies

Create your own albums by choosing desired images.

1 Choose to create a Custom album.

zFollowing steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums

(Story Highlights)” (=

127), choose

[Custom] and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose a selection method.

zChoose [Image Selection], [Date

Selection], or [Person Selection], and

then press the [ ] button.

3 Choose album elements.

zTouch elements for your album to label

them with [ ].

zPress the [ ] button after you are

nished selecting still images, short

clips, or Creative Shot movies in [Image

Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or

people in [Person Selection].

zChoose [Preview] and press the [ ]

button.

4 Choose background music.

zWhen the screen at left is displayed,

choose [Music Settings]. Add background

music as described in “Adding

Background Music to Albums” (=

128),

and then press the [ ] button.

130

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

4 Save the movie.

zChoose [Save] and press the [ ] button.

zOnce the movie is saved, [Saved] is

displayed.

5 Play the movie.

zChoose [Play Back Movie] on the

screen in step 1 to view a list of movies

you have created.

zChoose the movie to play and press the

[] button.

To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [ ] on the

screen in step 2.

To rearrange clips, touch [Sort] on the screen in step 2, select a

clip, press the [ ] button, drag left or right, and press the [ ]

button again.

To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the

screen in step 3.

To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen

in step 3 (=

128).

The image quality of movies saved is [ ] (for NTSC) or

[] (for PAL).

Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.

Combining Short Clips

Still Images Movies

Combine short clips to create a longer movie.

Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights

albums (=

127).

1 Access the editing screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Short

Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then

choose [Merge Clips] (=

29).

2 Specify clips to combine.

zDrag clips on the top of the screen left or

right, choose a clip to combine, and press

the [ ] button.

zYour selected clip is displayed on the

bottom of the screen.

zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button

again.

zRepeat these steps to specify other clips

to combine.

zAfter you are nished selecting clips,

press the [ ] button.

3 Preview the movie.

zChoose [Preview] and press the [ ]

button.

zAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few

seconds, a preview of the combined clips

is played.

131

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Available Wi-Fi Features

You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by

connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.

Smartphones and Tablets

Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi

functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a

smartphone or tablet.

For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other

compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.

Computer

Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via

Wi-Fi.

Web Services

Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to

send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera

can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY.

Printers

Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting

DPS over IP) to print them.

Another Camera

Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.

Wi-Fi Functions

Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety

of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web

services

Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)

Precautions” (=

209).

132

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible

Smartphone

Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the

process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.

Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending

on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.

If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched

together, you can choose and send images on the image selection

screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely

and geotag your shots (=

155). It’s easy to reconnect to recent

devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.

If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched

together, you can choose and send images from the index display

shown for image selection. The connection is ended automatically

after image transfer.

Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection

to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting

Mode

1 Install Camera Connect.

zActivate NFC on the smartphone and

touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together

to start Google Play on the smartphone

automatically. Once the Camera Connect

download page is displayed, download

and install the app.

Sending Images to a Smartphone

There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send

images.

Connect via NFC (=

132)

Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0

or later) against the camera to connect the devices.

Connect to a device assigned to the [ ] button (=

134)

Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies

sending images to a smartphone (=

134). Note that only one

smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.

Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (=

136)

You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it

to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.

Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated

Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application

(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon

website.

Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow

to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should

consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.

133

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

4 Send an image.

zDrag images left or right to choose an

image to send, and then touch [Send this

image].

zImage transfer will begin. The screen

darkens during image transfer.

z[Transfer completed] is displayed after

the image is sent, and the image transfer

screen is displayed again.

zTo end the connection, touch [ ] in

the upper right of the screen, and then

touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.

You can also use the smartphone to end

the connection.

When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.

Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This

may damage the devices.

Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize

each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices

together in slightly different positions. If connection is not

established, keep the devices together until the camera screen

is updated.

If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message

may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on

the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices

together again.

Do not place other objects between the camera and

smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or

similar accessories may block communication.

All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected

smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera

images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the

smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.

Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy

settings for it on the camera (=

156).

2 Establish the connection.

zMake sure the camera is off or in

Shooting mode.

zTouch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone

with Camera Connect installed against

the camera’s N-Mark.

zThe camera starts up automatically.

zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, touch [OK].

zCamera Connect is started on the

smartphone.

zThe devices are connected automatically.

3 Adjust the privacy setting.

zWhen this screen is displayed, touch

[Yes].

zYou can now use the smartphone to

browse, import, or geotag images on the

camera or shoot remotely.

134

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

If during connection a message on the camera requests you

to enter the nickname, enter it as described in “On-Screen

Keyboard” (=

30).

The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect

to via NFC in Playback mode.

You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (=

150).

Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the

Button

Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]

button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for

viewing and saving camera images on your connected device.

These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can

also use an existing access point (=

137).

1 Install Camera Connect.

zFor an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera

Connect in the App Store and download

and install the app.

zFor Android smartphones, nd Camera

Connect in Google Play and download

and install the app.

2 Press the [ ] button.

zPress the [ ] button.

Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step

2 (=

157).

Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For

details, refer to the smartphone user manual.

You can also send multiple images at once and change the image

size before sending (=

150).

To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (=

29) ► [ 4] tab

► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].

Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode

zPress the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

zTouch the smartphone with Camera

Connect installed (=

132) against the

camera’s N-Mark ( ).

zTouching an image to send will label it

with a [ ] icon.

zTo cancel selection, touch it again. [ ] is

no longer displayed.

zRepeat this process to choose additional

images.

zAfter you nish choosing images, press

the [ ] button, and then touch [OK].

zTouch [Send].

zThe images are now sent. The

connection is ended automatically after

the image is sent.

135

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

6 Choose the smartphone to connect to.

zTouch the name of the smartphone.

zAfter a connection is established with

the smartphone, the smartphone name

is displayed on the camera. (This screen

will close in about one minute.)

7 Import images.

zUse the smartphone to import images

from the camera to the smartphone.

zUse the smartphone to end the

connection; the camera will automatically

turn off.

Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in

step 2 (=

157).

For better security, you can display a password on the screen

in step 3 by accessing MENU (=

29) and choosing [ 4] tab

► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the

password eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password

displayed on the camera.

One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign

a different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (=

29) ►

[4] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].

Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions

(=

119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous

destination simply by dragging across the screen with the

assigned gesture.

zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, touch [OK].

3 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

zThe camera’s SSID is displayed.

4 Connect the smartphone to the

network.

zIn the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,

choose the SSID (network name)

displayed on the camera to establish a

connection.

5 Start Camera Connect.

zStart Camera Connect on the

smartphone.

zAfter the camera recognizes the

smartphone, a device selection screen is

displayed.

136

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

zThe camera’s SSID is displayed.

zChoose the smartphone to connect to,

as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending

to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”

(=

134).

5 Adjust the privacy setting.

zTouch [Yes].

zYou can now use the smartphone to

browse, import, or geotag images on the

camera or shoot remotely.

6 Send an image.

zDrag images left or right to choose an

image to send, and then touch [Send this

image].

zImage transfer will begin. The screen

darkens during image transfer.

z[Transfer completed] is displayed after

the image is sent, and the image transfer

screen is displayed again.

zTo end the connection, touch [ ] in

the upper right of the screen, and then

touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.

You can also use the smartphone to end

the connection.

zTo add multiple smartphones, repeat the

above procedure starting from step 1.

Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu

These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can

also use an existing access point (=

137).

1 Install Camera Connect.

zFor an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera

Connect in the App Store and download

and install the app.

zFor Android smartphones, nd Camera

Connect in Google Play and download

and install the app.

2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

zPress the [ ] button.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, choose [OK] (=

134).

3 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

4 Choose [Add a Device].

zTouch [Add a Device].

137

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

2 Connect the smartphone to the

access point.

3 Choose [Switch Network].

zTouch [Switch Network].

zA list of detected access points will be

displayed.

4 Connect to the access point and

choose the smartphone.

zFor WPS-compatible access points,

connect to the access point and choose

the smartphone as described in steps

5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access

Points” (=

140).

zFor non-WPS access points, follow steps

2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access

Points” (=

142) to connect to the

access point and choose the smartphone.

5 Congure the privacy settings and

send images.

zFollow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a

Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”

(=

136) to congure the privacy

settings and send images.

All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected

smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera

images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the

smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.

Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy

settings for it on the camera (=

156).

Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

Simply touch a listed device to connect again. You can register

new devices by dragging left or right to access the device

selection screen.

If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

(=

29) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►

[Off].

You can also send multiple images at once and change the image

size before sending (=

150).

Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions

(=

119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous

destination simply by dragging across the screen with the

assigned gesture.

Using Another Access Point

When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or

through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.

1 Prepare for the connection.

zAccess the [Waiting to connect] screen

by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending

to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”

(=

134) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a

Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”

(=

136).

138

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Saving Images to a Computer

Preparing to Register a Computer

Checking Your Computer Environment

The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following

operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility

information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon

website.

Windows 8/8.1

Windows 7 SP1

Mac OS X 10.9

Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later

Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.

Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)

require a separate download and installation of Windows Media

Feature Pack.

For details, check the following website.

http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730

Installing the Software

Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.

1 Download the software.

zVisit the following site from a computer

connected to the Internet.

http://www.canon.com/icpd/

Previous Access Points

To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in

“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (=

134) or step 4 in

“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

136).

To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the

screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose

[Camera Access Point Mode].

To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from

step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (=

137).

To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen

displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the

procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (=

137) from step 4.

139

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection

(Windows Only)

On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before

connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.

1 Conrm that the computer is

connected to an access point.

zFor instructions on checking your network

connection, refer to the computer user

manual.

2 Congure the setting.

zClick in the following order: [Start] menu

► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►

[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection

setup].

zIn the application that opens, follow the

on-screen instructions and congure the

setting.

The following Windows settings are congured when you run the

utility in step 2.

Turn on media streaming.

This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access

via Wi-Fi.

Turn on network discovery.

This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.

Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).

This allows you to check the network connection status.

Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).

This will enable network devices to detect each other

automatically.

Some security software may prevent you from completing the

settings as described here. Check the settings of your security

software.

zChoose your country or region, and

then follow the instructions displayed to

prepare for downloading.

zThe compressed software is now

downloaded to your computer.

2 Begin the installation.

zDouble-click the downloaded le, and

when the screen at left is displayed, click

[Easy Installation]. Follow the on-screen

instructions to complete the installation

process.

zInstallation may take some time,

depending on computer performance and

the Internet connection.

zClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen

after installation.

Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and

access fees must be paid separately.

To uninstall the software, follow these steps.

Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon

Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.

Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]

folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the

Trash, and then empty the Trash.

140

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on

checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.

A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for

connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal

Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.

This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access

points”.

If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure

to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can

check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (=

29)

► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].

Using WPS-Compatible Access Points

WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over

Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN

Method for settings on a WPS supported device.

1 Conrm that the computer is

connected to an access point.

zFor instructions on checking the

connection, refer to the device and

access point user manuals.

2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

zPress the [ ] button.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, touch [OK].

Saving Images to a Connected Computer

Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.

Also refer to the access point user manual.

Conrming Access Point Compatibility

Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi

standards in “Camera” (=

204).

Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point

supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, =

140) or not (=

142). For

non-WPS access points, check the following information.

Network name (SSID/ESSID)

The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the

“access point name” or “network name”.

Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /

encryption mode)

The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check

which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK

(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system

authentication), or no security.

Password (encryption key / network key)

The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also

called the “encryption key” or “network key”.

Key index (transmit key)

The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data

encryption. Use “1” as the setting.

If system administrator status is needed to adjust network

settings, contact the system administrator for details.

These settings are very important for network security. Exercise

adequate caution when changing these settings.

141

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

7 Establish the connection.

zOn the access point, hold down the WPS

connection button for a few seconds.

zTouch [Next].

zThe camera connects to the access point

and lists devices connected to it on the

[Select a Device] screen.

8 Choose the target device.

zTouch the name of the target device, and

then press the [ ] button.

9 Install a driver (rst Windows

connection only).

zWhen this screen is displayed on the

camera, click the Start menu on the

computer, click [Control Panel], and then

click [Add a device].

zDouble-click the connected camera icon.

zDriver installation will begin.

zAfter driver installation is complete, and

the camera and computer connection

is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be

displayed. Nothing will be displayed on

the camera screen.

3 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

4 Choose [Add a Device].

zTouch [Add a Device].

5 Choose [WPS Connection].

zTouch [WPS Connection].

6 Choose [PBC Method].

zTouch [PBC Method].

142

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

Simply touch a listed device to connect again. To add a new

device, display the device selection screen by touching [ ][ ],

and then congure the setting.

If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

(=

29) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►

[Off].

You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step

2 (=

157).

When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen

is blank.

Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the

[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.

To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.

If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed

on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.

Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further

details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.

Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions

(=

119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous

destination simply by dragging across the screen with the

assigned gesture.

Connecting to Listed Access Points

1 View the listed access points.

zView the listed networks (access points)

as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using

WPS-Compatible Access Points”

(=

140).

10 Display CameraWindow.

zWindows: Access CameraWindow by

clicking [Downloads Images From Canon

Camera].

zMac OS: CameraWindow is automatically

displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is

established between the camera and

computer.

11 Import images.

zClick [Import Images from Camera], and

then click [Import Untransferred Images].

zImages are now saved to the Pictures

folder on the computer, in separate

folders named by date.

zClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed

after image import is complete.

zUse Digital Photo Professional to view

images you save to a computer. To view

movies, use preinstalled or commonly

available software compatible with

movies recorded by the camera.

143

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Previous Access Points

You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by

following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=

140).

To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target

device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the

procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”

(=

140).

To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen

displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow

the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=

140)

from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”

(=

142) from step 2.

2 Choose an access point.

zTouch a network (access point) to choose

it.

3 Enter the access point password.

zTouch the text box (in the area outlined,

in this example) to access the keyboard,

and then enter the password (=

30).

zTouch [Next].

4 Choose [Auto].

zTouch [Auto].

zTo save images to a connected computer,

follow the procedure from step 8 in

“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”

(=

140).

To determine the access point password, check on the access

point itself or refer to the user manual.

If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]

in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2

to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen

instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password

(=

140).

When you use an access point that you have already connected

to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the

password in step 3. To use the same password, touch [Next].

144

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note

that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or

smartphone to receive a notication message for completing linkage

settings.

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

zPress the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is

displayed, touch [OK].

2 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

Sending Images to a Registered Web

Service

Registering Web Services

Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that

you want to use.

A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is

required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

and other Web services.

Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser

(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and

version information.

For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.

com/cig/).

You must have an account with Web services other than CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check

the websites for each Web service you want to register.

Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for

downloading.

145

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

7 Check for the notication message.

zOnce information has been sent to

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will

receive a notication message at the

email address entered in step 5.

zTouch [OK] on the next screen, which

indicates that notication has been sent.

z[] now changes to [ ].

8 Access the page in the notication

message and complete camera link

settings.

zFrom a computer or smartphone,

access the page linked in the notication

message.

zFollow the instructions to complete the

settings on the camera link settings page.

9 Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

settings on the camera.

zTouch [ ].

z[] (=

152) and CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY are now added as

destinations.

zYou can add other Web services,

as needed. In this case, follow the

instructions from step 2 in “Registering

Other Web Services” (=

146).

3 Accept the agreement to enter an

email address.

zRead the agreement displayed and touch

[I Agree].

4 Establish a connection with an

access point.

zConnect to the access point as described

in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible

Access Points” (=

140) or in steps 2 – 4

in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”

(=

142).

5 Enter your email address.

zOnce the camera is connected to CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a

screen is displayed for entering an email

address.

zEnter your email address and touch

[Next].

6 Enter a four-digit number.

zEnter a four-digit number of your choice

and touch [Next].

zYou will need this four-digit number later

when setting up linkage with CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.

146

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

3 Choose [ ].

zIn Playback mode, press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zDrag left or right on the screen, and then

touch [ ].

zThe Web service settings are now

updated.

If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to

update the camera settings.

Uploading Images to Web Services

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

zPress the [ ] button to turn the camera

on.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

2 Choose the destination.

zTouch the icon of the Web service to

connect to.

zIf multiple recipients or sharing options

are used with a Web service, touch the

desired item on the [Select Recipient]

screen displayed, and then press the [ ]

button.

Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail

application is not congured to block email from relevant domains,

which may prevent you from receiving the notication message.

You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in

step 1 (=

157).

Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Drag

left or right to access the device selection screen and then

congure the setting.

Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions

(=

119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous

destination simply by dragging across the screen with the

assigned gesture.

Registering Other Web Services

You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the

camera.

1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and

access the camera link settings page.

zFrom a computer or smartphone, access

http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

2 Congure the Web service you want

to use.

zFollow the instructions displayed on the

smartphone or computer to set up the

Web service.

147

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Printing Images Wirelessly from a

Connected Printer

Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.

These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can

also use an existing access point (=

137).

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

zAccess the Wi-Fi menu as described in

step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using

the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

136).

2 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

3 Choose [Add a Device].

zTouch [Add a Device].

zThe camera’s SSID is displayed.

3 Send an image.

zDrag images left or right to choose an

image to send, and then touch [Send this

image].

zWhen uploading to YouTube, read the

terms of service, and touch [I Agree].

zImage transfer will begin. The screen

darkens during image transfer.

zAfter the image is sent, touch [OK] on the

screen displayed to return to the playback

screen.

Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in

the camera.

You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and

add comments before sending (=

150).

To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a

smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.

Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for

iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from

Google Play.

148

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in

the camera.

Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

You can easily connect again by choosing the device. To add

a new device, drag left or right to access the device selection

screen, and then congure the setting.

If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

(=

29) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].

To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another

Access Point” (=

137).

Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions

(=

119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous

destination simply by dragging across the screen with the

assigned gesture.

4 Connect the printer to the network.

zIn the printers Wi-Fi setting menu,

choose the SSID (network name)

displayed on the camera to establish a

connection.

5 Choose the printer.

zTouch the name of the printer.

6 Choose an image to print.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

then press the [ ] button.

zTouch [Print].

zFor detailed printing instructions, see

“Printing Images” (=

175).

zTo end the connection, touch [Cancel]

and then touch [OK] on the conrmation

screen.

149

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

4 Send an image.

zDrag images left or right to choose an

image to send, and then touch [Send this

image].

zImage transfer will begin. The screen

darkens during image transfer.

z[Transfer completed] is displayed after

the image is sent, and the image transfer

screen is displayed again.

zTo end the connection, touch [ ] in

the upper right of the screen, and then

touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.

Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.

Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent

destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.

You can easily connect again by choosing the device. To add

a new device, drag left or right to access the device selection

screen, and then congure the setting.

If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU

(=

29) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►

[Off].

You can also send multiple images at once and change the image

size before sending (=

152).

Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions

(=

119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous

destination simply by dragging across the screen with the

assigned gesture.

Sending Images to Another Camera

Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as

follows.

Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be

connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera

that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.

zAccess the Wi-Fi menu as described in

step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using

the Wi-Fi Menu” (=

136).

2 Choose [ ].

zTouch [ ].

3 Choose [Add a Device].

zTouch [Add a Device].

zFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera

too.

zCamera connection information will be

added when [Start connection on target

camera] is displayed on both camera

screens.

150

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

2 Choose an image.

zTouching an image to send will label it

with a [ ] icon.

zTo cancel selection, touch it again. [ ] is

no longer displayed.

zRepeat this process to choose additional

images.

zAfter you nish choosing images, press

the [ ] button.

zTouch [OK].

3 Send the images.

zTouch [Send].

You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom

lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then

touching images.

Selecting a Range

1 Choose [Select Range].

zFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple

Images” (=

150), choose [Select

Range] and press the [ ] button.

2 Choose images.

zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”

(=

114) to specify images.

zTo include movies, touch [ ] to add a

[] next to [Incl. Movies].

zTouch [OK].

3 Send the images.

zTouch [Send].

Image Sending Options

You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image

recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also

enable you to annotate the images you send.

Sending Multiple Images

1 Choose [Select and send].

zOn the image transfer screen, touch

[Select and send].

2 Choose a selection method.

zTouch a selection method, and then press

the [ ] button.

Choosing Images Individually

1 Choose [Select].

zFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple

Images” (=

150), choose [Select] and

press the [ ] button.

151

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Notes on Sending Images

Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take

a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera

battery level.

Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you

can send.

For movies that you do not compress (=

126), a separate,

compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may

delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough

space for it on the memory card.

When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image

quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the

smartphone user manual.

On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following

icons.

[] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak

Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending

images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY server.

Sending Favorite Images

Send only images tagged as favorites (=

118).

1 Choose [Favorite Images].

zFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple

Images” (=

150), choose [Favorite

Images] and press the [ ] button.

zAn image selection screen for favorites is

displayed. If you prefer not to include an

image, touch the image to remove [ ].

zAfter you nish choosing images, press

the [ ] button.

zTouch [OK].

2 Send the images.

zTouch [Send].

In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have

tagged images as favorites.

152

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Sending Images Automatically

(Image Sync)

Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can

be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.

Initial Preparations

Preparing the Camera

Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,

so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on

the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

On the destination computer, you will install and congure Image Transfer

Utility, free software compatible with Image Sync.

1 Add [ ] as a destination.

zAdd [ ] as a destination, as described in

“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”

(=

144).

zTo include a Web service as the

destination, log in to CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY (=

144), select your camera

model, access the Web service settings

screen, and choose the destination

Web service in Image Sync settings.

For details, refer to CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY Help.

Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels

(Image Size)

On the image transfer screen, you can choose the recording pixel setting

(size) of images to send by touching [ ].

To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.

Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size

before sending.

Movies cannot be resized.

Image size can also be congured in MENU (=

29) ► [ 4] tab

► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].

Adding Comments

Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send

to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of

characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the

Web service.

1 Access the screen for adding

comments.

zOn the image transfer screen, touch [ ].

2 Add a comment (=

30).

3 Send the image.

When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.

You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The

same comment is added to all images sent together.

153

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Preparing the Computer

Install and congure the software on the destination computer.

1 Install Image Transfer Utility.

zInstall Image Transfer Utility on a

computer connected to the Internet

(=

138).

zImage Transfer Utility can also be

downloaded from the Image Sync

settings page of CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY (=

152).

2 Register the camera.

zWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],

and then click [Add new camera].

zMac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and

then click [Add new camera].

zA list of cameras linked to CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose

the camera from which images are to be

sent.

zOnce the camera is registered and the

computer is ready to receive images, the

icon changes to [ ].

2 Choose the type of images to send

(only when sending movies with

images).

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=

29).

zChoose [Image Sync], press the [ ]

button, and then choose [Stills/Movies].

3 Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only

when sending images by pressing

the [ ] button).

zClear the [ ] button setting if a

smartphone is already assigned to the

button (=

134).

zPress the [ ] button to access the mobile

connection screen, choose [ ], and then

press the [ ] button.

154

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone

By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can

use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync

while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

server.

In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.

Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing

the Computer” (=

153).

Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones

or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.

Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=

144), select your camera

model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing

and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For

details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.

Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be

viewed.

Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and

downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.

For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon

Online Photo Album Help.

Sending Images

Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.

If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images

will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.

Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer

and save the images.

1 Send images.

zIf you have already assigned [ ] to the

[] button, press the [ ] button.

zIf you have not assigned the button this

way, choose [ ] as described in steps

1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web

Services” (=

146).

zSent images are labeled with a [ ] icon.

2 Save the images to the computer.

zImages are automatically saved to the

computer when you turn it on.

zImages are automatically sent to Web

services from the CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY server, even if the computer

is off.

When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery

pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =

168).

Even if images were imported to the computer through a different

method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.

Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same

network as the camera, because images are sent via the access

point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images

stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so

the computer must be connected to the Internet.

155

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Shooting Remotely

As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to

shoot remotely.

1 Choose a shooting mode.

zTurn the mode dial to choose [ ], [ ],

[], [ ], or [ ] as the mode.

2 Secure the camera.

zOnce remote shooting begins, the

camera lens will come out. Lens motion

from zooming may also move the camera

out of position. Keep the camera still by

mounting it on a tripod or taking other

measures.

3 Connect the camera and

smartphone (=

134, =

136).

zIn the privacy settings, choose [Yes].

4 Choose remote shooting.

zIn Camera Connect on the smartphone,

choose remote shooting.

zThe camera lens will come out. Keep

your ngers away from the lens, and

make sure no objects will obstruct it.

zOnce the camera is ready for remote

shooting, a live image from the camera

will be displayed on the smartphone.

zAt this time, a message is displayed on

the camera, and all operations except

pressing the power button are disabled.

5 Shoot.

zUse the smartphone to shoot.

Using a Smartphone to View Camera

Images and Control the Camera

You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera

Connect.

Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone

Geotag images on the camera (=

155)

Shoot remotely (=

155)

Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image

viewing on the smartphone (=

134, =

136, =

156).

Geotagging Images on the Camera

GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera

Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are

tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.

Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home

time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and

Time” (=

20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (=

162)

to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.

Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data

in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing

these images with others, as when posting images online where

many others can view them.

156

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings

Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.

Editing Connection Information

1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose

a device to edit.

zPress the [ ] button.

zPress the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ], and then press the [ ]

button.

zDrag left or right to access the device

selection screen, and then touch the icon

of a device to edit.

2 Choose [Edit a Device].

zTouch [Edit a Device], and then press the

[] button.

3 Choose the device to edit.

zTouch the device to edit, and then press

the [ ] button.

4 Choose the item to edit.

zTouch the item you want to edit.

zThe items you can change depend on the

device or service.

[] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [ ],

[], [ ], and [ ]. However, some Quick Set and MENU

settings you have congured in advance may be changed

automatically.

Movie shooting is not available.

Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the

connection environment will not affect recorded images.

Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the

smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.

157

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Changing the Camera Nickname

Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as

desired.

1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=

29).

2 Choose [Change Device Nickname].

zDrag up or down to touch [Change

Device Nickname], and then press the

[] button.

3 Change the nickname.

zPress the [ ] button to access the

keyboard (=

30), and then enter a

nickname.

A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with

a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different

nickname.

You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]

screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the

text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then

enter a new nickname.

Congurable Items

Connection

Web

Services

[Change Device Nickname]

(=

157)

OOOO

[View Settings] (=

134)

O

[Erase Connection Info] (=

157)

OOOO

O

: Congurable : Not congurable

Changing a Device Nickname

You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on

the camera.

zFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection

Information” (=

156), choose [Change

Device Nickname] and press the [ ]

button.

zSelect the input eld and press the [ ]

button. Use the keyboard displayed to

enter a new nickname (=

30).

Erasing Connection Information

Erase connection information (information about devices that you have

connected to) as follows.

zFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection

Information” (=

156), choose [Erase

Connection Info] and press the [ ]

button.

zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].

zThe connection information will be

erased.

158

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default

Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the

camera to another person, or dispose of it.

Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be

sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.

1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].

zPress the [ ] button and choose

[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=

29).

2 Choose [Reset Settings].

zDrag up or down and touch [Reset

Settings].

3 Restore the default settings.

zTouch [OK].

zThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.

To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose

[Reset All] on the [ 4] tab (=

166).

159

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Adjusting Basic Camera Functions

MENU (=

29) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], [ 4], and [ 5] tabs

can be congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for

greater convenience.

Date-Based Image Storage

Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the

camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.

zChoose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab,

and then choose [Daily].

zImages will now be saved in folders

created on the shooting date.

File Numbering

Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)

and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change

how the camera assigns le numbers.

zChoose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab,

and then choose an option.

Continuous

Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th

shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory

cards.

Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch

memory cards, or when a new folder is created.

Setting Menu

Customize or adjust basic camera functions for

greater convenience

160

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Low-Level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is

displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing

is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly

stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-

level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take

other steps to back them up.

zOn the screen in step 2 of “Formatting

Memory Cards” (=

160), press the

[] button to choose [Low Level

Format]. A [ ] icon is displayed.

zFollow step 2 in “Formatting Memory

Cards” (=

160) to continue with the

formatting process.

Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory

Cards” (=

160), because data is erased from all storage regions

of the memory card.

You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing

[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card

can be used normally.

Changing the Video System

Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting

determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.

zChoose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab,

and then choose an option.

Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be

numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images

on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,

use an empty (or formatted, =

160) memory card.

Formatting Memory Cards

Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,

you should format the card with this camera.

Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy

images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back

them up.

1 Access the [Format] screen.

zChoose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and

then press the [ ] button.

2 Choose [OK].

zTouch [OK].

zThe memory card is now formatted.

Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le

management information on the card and does not erase the data

completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,

take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by

physically destroying cards.

The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be

less than the advertised capacity.

161

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Switching the Color of Screen Information

Still Images Movies

Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color

suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is

useful in modes such as [ ] (=

63).

zChoose [Night Display] on the [ 2] tab,

and then choose [On] (=

29).

zTo restore the original display, choose

[Off].

You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the

[] button for at least one second on the shooting screen or

in Playback mode during single-image display.

Using Eco Mode

This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.

When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce

battery consumption.

1 Congure the setting.

zChoose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and

then choose [On].

z[] is now shown on the shooting

screen (=

188).

zThe screen darkens when the camera

is not used for approximately two

seconds; approximately ten seconds

after darkening, the screen turns off.

The camera turns off after approximately

three minutes of inactivity.

Electronic Level Calibration

Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the

camera.

For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (=

98) to help you

level the camera in advance.

1 Make sure the camera is level.

zPlace the camera on a at surface, such

as a table.

2 Calibrate the electronic level.

zChoose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose [Calibrate] and press the

[] button. A conrmation message is

displayed.

zTouch [OK].

Resetting the Electronic Level

Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is

not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.

zChoose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose [Reset], and then press the [ ]

button.

zTouch [OK].

162

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button

for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed

or when in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp.

Brightness] setting on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original

brightness, press and hold the [ ] button again for at least

one second or restart the camera.

World Clock

To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when

you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to

that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the

Date/Time setting manually.

1 Specify your home time zone.

zChoose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and

then press the [ ] button.

zWhen conguring this setting for the rst

time, make sure [ Home] is selected,

and then press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ][ ] to choose the home time

zone.

To set daylight saving time (1 hour

ahead), touch [ ].

zPress the [ ] button.

2 Specify your destination.

zTouch [ World], and then press the [ ]

button.

zTouch [ ][ ] to choose the destination

time zone.

zIf necessary, specify daylight saving time

as in step 1.

zPress the [ ] button.

2 Shoot.

zTo activate the screen and prepare for

shooting when the screen is off but the

lens is still out, press the shutter button

halfway.

Power-Saving Adjustment

Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto

Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=

26).

zChoose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose an item, and then choose an

option.

To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for

[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].

The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power

Down] to [Off].

These power-saving functions are not available when you have

set Eco mode (=

161) to [On].

Screen Brightness

Adjust screen brightness as follows.

zChoose [Disp. Brightness] on the [ 2]

tab, and then press the [ ] button.

zTouch [ ][ ] to adjust the brightness.

163

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Display Language

Change the display language as needed.

zChoose [Language ] on the [ 3] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose a language, and then press the

[] button.

You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by

pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing

the [ ] button.

Silencing Camera Operations

Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.

zChoose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then

choose [On].

Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]

button as you turn the camera on.

Sound is not played during movies (=

103) if you mute camera

sounds. To restore sound during movies, drag up across the

screen. Adjust volume by dragging up or down, as needed.

3 Switch to the destination time zone.

zMake sure [ World] is selected, and

then press the [ ] button.

z[] is now shown on [Time Zone] and

shooting screens (=

188).

Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=

21) will

automatically update your [ Home] time and date.

Date and Time

Adjust the date and time as follows.

zChoose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab, and

then press the [ ] button.

zTouch the option to congure, and then

touch [ ][ ] to specify the date and

time.

Lens Retraction Timing

The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press

the [ ] button in Shooting mode (=

25). To have the lens retracted

immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to

[0 sec.].

zChoose [Lens Retraction] on the [ 2] tab,

and then choose [0 sec.].

164

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Hiding Hints and Tips

Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu

(=

28) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.

zChoose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab,

and then choose [Off].

Listing Shooting Modes by Icon

List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode

names, for faster selection.

zChoose [Mode icon size/info] on the [ 3]

tab, and then choose [Small, no info].

Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity

Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera

responds to a lighter touch.

zChoose [Touch Operation] on the [ 4]

tab, and then choose [Sensitive].

Adjusting the Volume

Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.

zChoose [Volume] on the [ 3] tab, and

then press the [ ] button.

zDrag up or down to choose an item, and

then adjust the volume by touching the

desired position on the bar.

Customizing Sounds

Customize camera operating sounds as follows.

zChoose [Sound Options] on the [ 3] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose an item, and then press the [ ]

button.

zChoose an option.

The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode

(=

35) cannot be changed.

Start-Up Screen

Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as

follows.

zChoose [Start-up Image] on the [ 1] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose an option.

165

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Checking Certication Logos

Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be

viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on

the camera packaging, or on the camera body.

zChoose [Certication Logo Display] on

the [ 4] tab, and then press the [ ]

button.

Setting Copyright Information to Record in

Images

To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this

information beforehand as follows.

zChoose [Copyright Info] on the [ 4] tab,

and then press the [ ] button.

zChoose [Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter

Copyright Details], press the [ ] button

to access the keyboard, and then enter

the name (=

30).

zPress the [ ] button. When [Accept

changes?] is displayed, touch [Yes].

zThe information set here will now be

recorded in images.

To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]

on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.

Automatically Locking the Touch-Screen Panel

To prevent unintended operations, you can set up automatic locking of the

touch-screen panel.

zChoose [Screen auto-lock settings] on

the [ 4] tab, and then press the [ ]

button.

zChoose [Screen auto lock], and then

choose [Enable].

zChoose [Auto-locks after], and then

choose an option.

zTo unlock the touch-screen panel, press

the shutter button halfway.

The touch-screen panel can also be unlocked by pressing or

turning controls, such as the [ ] button or [ ] ring.

Metric / Non-Metric Display

Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (=

33), the

MF indicator (=

81), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.

zChoose [Units] on the [ 4] tab, and then

choose [ft/in].

166

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Restoring Default Camera Settings

If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera

settings.

1 Access the [Reset All] screen.

zChoose [Reset All] on the [ 5] tab, and

then press the [ ] button.

2 Restore default settings.

zTouch [OK].

zDefault settings are now restored.

The following functions are not restored to default settings.

Information registered using Face ID (=

43)

[1] tab setting [Video system] (=

160)

[2] tab settings [Time Zone] (=

162), [Date/Time] (=

163),

and [ 3] tab setting [Language ] (=

163)

Custom white balance data you have recorded (=

78)

Shooting Mode

Wi-Fi settings (=

131)

Calibrated value for the electronic level (=

161)

Copyright information (=

165)

Deleting All Copyright Information

You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same

time as follows.

zFollow the steps in “Setting Copyright

Information to Record in Images”

(=

165) and choose [Delete Copyright

Info].

zTouch [OK].

The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.

Adjusting Other Settings

The following settings can also be adjusted.

[4] tab setting [Wi-Fi Settings] (=

131)

[4] tab setting [Mobile Device Connect Button] (=

134)

167

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

System Map

*1 Also available for purchase separately.

*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).

*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).

Wrist Strap Battery Pack

NB-13L*1

Battery Charger

CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1

USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*2

Memory Card Card Reader Computer

TV/Video

System

Connect

Station CS100

AC Adapter Kit

ACK-DC110

Included Accessories

Power

Cables

HDMI Cable

(camera end: Type D)*3

Power

PictBridge-Compatible Printers

High-Power Flash

HF-DC2

Compact Power

Adapter

CA-DC30/CA-DC30E

Flash Unit

Accessories

Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon

accessories and other compatible accessories sold

separately

168

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Optional Accessories

The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that

availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be

available.

Power Supplies

Battery Pack NB-13L

zRechargeable lithium-ion battery

Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE

zCharger for Battery Pack NB-13L

The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you

use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is

required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages

resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur

due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.

The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can

attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so

that is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that

is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used

with genuine Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents

such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon

accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please

note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such

malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.

169

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Other Accessories

Interface Cable IFC-600PCU

zFor connecting the camera to a computer

or printer.

Printers

Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible

Printers

zEven without using a computer, you can

print images by connecting the camera

directly to a printer.

For details, visit your nearest Canon

retailer.

Photo and Movie Storage

Connect Station CS100

A media hub for storing camera images,

viewing on a connected TV, printing

wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,

sharing over the Internet, and more.

AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110

zFor powering the camera using

household power. Recommended when

using the camera over extended periods,

or when connecting the camera to a

printer or computer. Cannot be used to

charge the battery pack in the camera.

Compact Power Adapter

CA-DC30/CA-DC30E

zInsert the included battery pack into the

camera for charging. Interface Cable

IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required

to connect the adapter to the camera.

The battery charger, AC adapter kit, and compact power adapter

can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).

For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially

available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer

designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.

Flash Unit

High-Power Flash HF-DC2

zExternal ash for illuminating subjects

that are out of range of the built-in ash.

High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be

used.

High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [ ], or [ ]

shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].

170

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

zOn the camera, open the terminal cover

and insert the cable plug fully into the

camera terminal.

3 Turn the TV on and switch to

external input.

zSwitch the TV input to the external input

you connected the cable to in step 2.

4 Turn the camera on.

zPress the [ ] button.

zImages from the camera are now

displayed on the TV. (Nothing is

displayed on the camera screen.)

zWhen nished, turn off the camera and

TV before disconnecting the cable.

Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on

a TV (=

189).

Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is

connected to an HDTV.

Using Optional Accessories

Still Images Movies

Playback on a TV

Still Images Movies

You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV

with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,

with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image

quality of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or

[] can be viewed in high denition.

For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.

The following camera functions are available when using a TV for

display.

Browsing images

Drag left or right across the screen (=

103).

Playing movies (=

104)

Zoom in (=

112)

To zoom in, move the zoom lever toward [ ] or spread your ngers

apart (pinch out).

Group playback (=

110)

Touch Actions (=

119)

Erasing is not available.

Note that when the camera is connected to a TV, nothing is displayed on

the camera screen. Watch the TV screen as you control the camera.

1 Make sure the camera and TV are

off.

2 Connect the camera to the TV.

zOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into

the HDMI input as shown.

171

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

4 Close the cover.

zLower the cover (1) and hold it down as

you slide the switch, until it clicks into the

closed position (2).

5 Connect the power cord.

zInsert one end of the power cord into the

compact power adapter, and then plug

the other end into a power outlet.

zTurn the camera on and use it as desired.

zWhen nished, turn the camera off and

unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while

the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the

camera.

Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing

so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.

(

)

(2)

Powering the Camera with Household Power

Still Images Movies

Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)

eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.

1 Make sure the camera is off.

2 Open the cover.

zFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery

Pack and Your Memory Card” (=

19)

to open the memory card/battery cover,

and then open the coupler cable port

cover as shown.

3 Insert the coupler.

zHolding the coupler with the terminals (1)

facing as shown, insert the coupler just

as you would a battery pack (following

step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and

Your Memory Card” (=

19)).

zMake sure the coupler cable passes

through the port (1).

(2)

(1)

(1)

172

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

3 Charge the battery pack.

zCA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug

the compact power adapter into a power

outlet (2).

zCA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the

compact power adapter, then plug the

other end into a power outlet.

zCharging begins and the USB charge

lamp lights up.

zThe lamp turns off when charging

nishes.

zRemove the compact power adapter from

the power outlet and the interface cable

from the camera.

To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not

charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.

When charging a different battery pack, be sure rst to disconnect

the interface cable from the camera and then insert another

battery pack for charging.

Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack

Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an

optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E or Interface Cable

IFC-600PCU.

1 Insert the battery pack.

zFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery

Pack and Your Memory Card” (=

19)

to open the cover.

zInsert the battery pack as described in

step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and

Your Memory Card” (=

19).

zFollow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery

Pack and Your Memory Card” (=

19)

to close the cover.

2 Connect the compact power adapter

to the camera.

zWith the camera turned off, open the

cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the

interface cable (sold separately) facing

as shown and insert the plug fully into the

camera terminal (2).

zInsert the larger plug of the interface

cable into the compact power adapter.

(1)

(2)

173

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Using the Software

To utilize the features of the following software, download the software

from the Canon website and install it on your computer.

CameraWindow

Import images to your computer

Image Transfer Utility

Set up Image Sync (=

152) and receive images

Map Utility

Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images

Digital Photo Professional

Browse, process and edit RAW images

To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or

commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by

the camera.

For details on charging time and the number of shots and

recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see

“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (=

205).

You can view images even while the battery is charging, by

turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (=

23).

However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.

Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when

they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately

before) the day of use.

The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power

(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a

commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an

electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage

the battery pack.

Using a Computer to Charge the Battery

You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the

interface cable into a computers USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and

Charging the Battery Pack” (=

172). For details about USB connections

on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.

Charging is not possible when the camera is off.

With some computers, battery charging may require the memory

card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera

(=

19) before connecting the cable to the computers USB port.

174

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

zConnect the larger cable plug to the

computer. For details on computer

connections, refer to the computer user

manual.

2 Turn the camera on to access

CameraWindow.

zPress the [ ] button.

zMac OS: CameraWindow is displayed

when a connection is established

between the camera and computer.

zWindows: Follow the steps introduced

below.

zIn the screen that is displayed, click the

change program link of [ ].

zChoose [Downloads Images From Canon

Camera] and then click [OK].

zDouble-click [ ].

Computer Connections via a Cable

Checking Your Computer Environment

The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed

system requirements and compatibility information, including support in

new operating systems, visit the Canon website.

Windows 8/8.1

Windows 7 SP1

Mac OS X 10.10

Mac OS X 10.9

When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system

requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (=

138).

Installing the Software

For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”

(=

138).

Saving Images to a Computer

Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can

connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.

1 Connect the camera to the computer.

zWith the camera turned off, open the

cover. With the smaller plug of the cable

in the orientation shown, insert the plug

fully into the camera terminal.

175

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Printing Images

Still Images Movies

Print your shots and congure a variety of settings used for your printer

or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-

compatible printer with a cable.

A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge

printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.

Easy Print

Still Images Movies

Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible

printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).

1 Make sure the camera and printer

are off.

2 Connect the camera to the printer.

zOpen the terminal cover. Holding the

smaller cable plug in the orientation

shown, insert the plug fully into the

camera terminal.

zConnect the larger cable plug to the

printer. For other connection details, refer

to the printer manual.

3 Turn the printer on.

4 Choose an image.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

3 Save the images to the computer.

zClick [Import Images from Camera], and

then click [Import Untransferred Images].

zImages are now saved to the Pictures

folder on the computer, in separate

folders named by date.

zAfter images are saved, close

CameraWindow, press the [ ] button to

turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.

zTo view images you save to a computer,

use preinstalled or commonly available

software compatible with images

captured by the camera.

Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]

icon in the taskbar.

Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the

[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.

Although you can save images to a computer simply by

connecting your camera to the computer without using the

software, the following limitations apply.

It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the

computer until camera images are accessible.

Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal

orientation.

RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)

may not be saved.

Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved

to a computer.

Some problems may occur when saving images or image

information, depending on the operating system version, the

software in use, or image le sizes.

176

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Conguring Print Settings

Still Images Movies

1 Access the printing screen.

zFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”

(=

175) to access this screen.

2 Congure the settings.

zTouch an item, and on the next screen,

choose an option. Press the [ ] button to

return to the printing screen.

Default Matches current printer settings.

Date Prints images with the date added.

File No. Prints images with the le number added.

Both Prints images with both the date and le

number added.

Off

Default Matches current printer settings.

Off

On Uses information from the time of shooting to

print under optimal settings.

Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.

No. of

Copies Choose the number of copies to print.

Cropping Specify a desired image area to print (=

177).

Paper

Settings Specify the paper size, layout, and other details

(=

177).

5 Access the printing screen.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and

press the [ ] button again.

6 Print the image.

zChoose [Print] and press the [ ] button.

zPrinting now begins.

zTo print other images, repeat the above

procedures starting from step 4 after

printing is nished.

zWhen you are nished printing, turn the

camera and printer off and disconnect

the cable.

For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),

see “Printers” (=

169).

RAW images cannot be printed.

177

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [Paper Settings].

zAfter following step 1 in “Conguring Print

Settings” (=

176) to access the printing

screen, touch [Paper Settings].

2 Choose a paper size.

zChoose an option, and then press the

[] button.

3 Choose a type of paper.

zChoose an option, and then press the

[] button.

4 Choose a layout.

zDrag up or down to choose an option.

zWhen choosing [N-up], specify the

number of images per sheet.

zPress the [ ] button.

5 Print the image.

zFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (=

175)

to print.

Cropping Images before Printing

Still Images Movies

By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area

instead of the entire image.

1 Choose [Cropping].

zAfter following step 1 in “Conguring Print

Settings” (=

176) to access the printing

screen, touch [Cropping].

zA cropping frame is now displayed,

indicating the image area to print.

2 Adjust the cropping frame as

needed.

zTo resize the frame, move the zoom

lever.

zTo move the frame, drag it.

zTo rotate the frame, press the [ ]

button.

zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.

3 Print the image.

zFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (=

175)

to print.

Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some

aspect ratios.

178

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

4 Print the image.

zFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (=

175)

to print.

Printing Movie Scenes

Still Images Movies

1 Access the printing screen.

zFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”

(=

175) to choose a movie. The screen

at left is displayed.

2 Choose a printing method.

zChoose [ ] and press the [ ] button.

On the next screen, choose an option,

and then press the [ ] button to return to

the printing screen.

3 Print the image.

zFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (=

175)

to print.

Movie Printing Options

Single Prints the current scene as a still image.

Sequence

Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single

sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le

number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]

to [On].

To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, and then

touch [OK].

After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of

“Viewing” (=

103), you can also access the screen in step 1

here by touching [ ] in the movie control panel.

Available Layout Options

Default Matches current printer settings.

Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.

Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.

N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.

ID Photo

Prints images for identication purposes.

Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L

and an aspect ratio of 3:2.

Fixed Size Choose the print size.

Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.

Printing ID Photos

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [ID Photo].

zFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing

Paper Size and Layout before Printing”

(=

177), choose [ID Photo] and press

the [ ] button.

2 Choose the long and short side

length.

zChoose an item and press the [ ]

button. On the next screen, choose the

length, and then press the [ ] button.

3 Choose the printing area.

zFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before

Printing” (=

177) to choose the printing

area.

179

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the

printer or photo development service, in some cases.

[] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the

memory card has print settings that were congured on another

camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may

overwrite all previous settings.

Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both

[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.

Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-

compatible printers (sold separately).

The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/

Time] on the [ 2] tab (=

20).

Setting Up Printing for Individual Images

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Print

settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press

the [ ] button.

zChoose [Select Images & Qty.], and then

press the [ ] button.

2 Choose an image.

zDrag left or right across the screen to

choose an image.

zImages you specify for index printing are

labeled with a [0] icon.

Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)

Still Images Movies

Batch printing (=

180) and ordering prints from a photo development

service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a

memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of

copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will

conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.

RAW images cannot be included in print list.

Conguring Print Settings

Still Images Movies

Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and

other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.

zPress the [ ] button, choose [Print

settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press

the [ ] button.

zChoose [Print Settings], and then press

the [ ] button. On the next screen,

choose and congure items as needed.

Print Type

Standard One image is printed per sheet.

Index Smaller versions of multiple images are

printed per sheet.

Both Both standard and index formats are printed.

Date On Images are printed with the shooting date.

Off

File No. On Images are printed with the le number.

Off

Clear DPOF

data

On All image print list settings are cleared after

printing.

Off

180

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Clearing All Images from the Print List

zFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing

for Individual Images” (=

179), choose

[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]

button.

zTouch [OK].

Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)

Still Images Movies

zWhen images have been added to the

print list (=

179 – =

180), this screen

is displayed after you connect the camera

to a PictBridge-compatible printer.

Choose [Print now], and then simply

press the [ ] button to print the images

in the print list.

zAny DPOF print job that you temporarily

stop will be resumed from the next image.

3 Specify the number of prints.

zTouch [ ][ ] to specify the number of

prints (up to 99).

zTo set up printing for other images and

specify the number of prints, repeat

steps 2 – 3.

zWhen nished, press the [ ] button

to return to the menu screen.

Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images

Still Images Movies

zFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing

for Individual Images” (=

179), choose

[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.

zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”

(=

114) to specify images.

zTouch [Order].

Setting Up Printing for All Images

Still Images Movies

zFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing

for Individual Images” (=

179), choose

[Select All Images] and press the [ ]

button.

zTouch [OK].

181

Appendix

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

2 Choose an image.

zChoose an image after dragging left or

right to browse. Press the [ ] button.

z[] is displayed.

zTo remove the image from the photobook,

press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no

longer displayed.

zRepeat this process to specify other

images.

zWhen nished, press the [ ] button

to return to the menu screen.

Adding All Images to a Photobook

Still Images Movies

zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

181), choose

[Select All Images] and press the [ ]

button.

zTouch [OK].

Removing All Images from a Photobook

Still Images Movies

zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

181), choose

[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]

button.

zTouch [OK].

Adding Images to a Photobook

Still Images Movies

Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images

on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your

computer (=

173), where they are copied to their own folder. This

is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing

photobooks with your own printer.

Choosing a Selection Method

zPress the [ ] button, choose

[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 4] tab, and

then choose how you will select images.

[] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the

memory card has print settings that were congured on another

camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may

overwrite all previous settings.

Adding Images Individually

Still Images Movies

1 Choose [Select].

zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing

a Selection Method” (=

181), choose

[Select] and press the [ ] button.

182

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Troubleshooting

If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.

If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer

Support Help Desk.

Power

Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.

Conrm that the battery pack is charged (=

18).

Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=

19).

Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=

19).

Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals

with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.

The battery pack runs out of power quickly.

Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery

pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals

do not touch any metal objects.

Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals

with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.

If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon

after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.

The lens is not retracted.

Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the

cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (=

19).

The battery pack is swollen.

Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if

battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a

Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Display on a TV

Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (=

170).

Appendix

Helpful information when using the camera

183

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the

shutter button is pressed halfway.

To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the

shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter

button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.

Subjects in shots look too dark.

Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

87).

Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=

74).

Use AE lock or spot metering (=

74, =

74).

Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.

Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

33).

Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=

74).

Use AE lock or spot metering (=

74, =

74).

Reduce the lighting on subjects.

Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (=

36).

Shoot within ash range (=

204).

Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash

output level (=

88, =

95).

Increase the ISO speed (=

75).

Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.

Shoot within ash range (=

204).

Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

33).

Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash

output level (=

88, =

95).

White spots appear in ash shots.

This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.

Shots look grainy.

Lower the ISO speed (=

75).

High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=

57).

Subjects are affected by red-eye.

Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (=

53). The red-eye reduction lamp (=

4)

will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye

reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at

closer range.

Edit images using red-eye correction (=

124).

Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is

slower.

Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=

160).

Shooting

Cannot shoot.

In Playback mode (=

103), press the shutter button halfway (=

26).

Strange display on the screen under low light (=

27).

Strange display on the screen when shooting.

Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are

recorded in movies.

The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent

or LED lighting.

Full-screen display is not available while shooting (=

90).

[] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting

is not possible (=

36).

[] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=

36).

Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (=

52).

Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=

87).

Increase the ISO speed (=

75).

Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,

you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure

the camera (=

52).

Shots are out of focus.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the

way down to shoot (=

26).

Make sure subjects are within focusing range (=

205).

Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (=

53).

Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.

Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=

83, =

87).

Shots are blurry.

Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending

on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.

Continuous shooting suddenly stops.

Continuous shooting stops automatically after about 2,000 shots are taken at one

time. Release the shutter button a moment before you resume shooting.

184

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Playback

Playback is not possible.

Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename

les or alter the folder structure.

Playback stops, or audio skips.

Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the

camera (=

160).

There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards

that have slow read speeds.

When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may

skip if computer performance is inadequate.

Sound is not played during movies.

Adjust the volume (=

23) if you have activated [Mute] (=

163) or the sound

in the movie is faint.

No sound is played for [ ] mode movies (=

60), [ ] mode movies

(=

66), or Creative Shot movies, because audio is not recorded in these

modes.

Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by touching [ ].

Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the

camera from the printer.

Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi

connection.

A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story

Highlights home screen.

In simple information display mode (=

105), choose an image that shows the

name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home

screen (=

127).

Memory Card

The memory card is not recognized.

Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (=

25).

Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.

Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available

in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (=

190 –

=

195).

The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.

The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in

face information (=

43). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set

the birthday, re-register face information (=

44), or make sure that the date/

time is set correctly (=

163).

Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.

Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.

Touch closer to the center of the screen.

If [Screen auto-lock settings] is set to [Enable], unlock the touch-screen panel

(=

165).

Shooting Movies

The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.

Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports

high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the

length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time

(=

160, =

206).

[] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.

The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to

the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.

Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=

160).

Lower the image quality (=

49).

Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (=

206).

Zooming is not possible.

Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (=

63).

Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (=

60), [ ], and [ ]

modes.

Subjects look distorted.

Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a

malfunction.

Linear noise is recorded.

Linear noise may be recorded if lights or other sources of bright light are visible

on the shooting screen in an otherwise dark scene. Recompose the shot so that

the bright light is not visible on the shooting screen or nearby.

185

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Cannot send images.

The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space

on the destination device and resend the images.

The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to

the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.

RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW format,

only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.

Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if

you move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images

sent using Image Sync via an access point (=

152). Before moving or renaming

these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already

been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.

Cannot resize images for sending.

Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their

original size.

Movies cannot be resized.

Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.

Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce

sending time (=

152).

Movies may take a long time to send.

Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as

microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the

2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ ]

is displayed.

Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as

the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

No notication message is received on a computer or smartphone after

adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.

Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the

destination again.

Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured to

block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notication

message.

Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the

camera or giving it to someone else.

Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=

158).

Computer

Cannot transfer images to a computer.

When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the

transfer speed as follows.

While holding the shutter button and zoom lever toward [ ], press the [ ]

button. In Playback mode, move the zoom lever toward [ ], and on the next

screen, choose [B] and press the [ ] button.

Wi-Fi

Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu.

The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and

try again.

In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display

or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the

Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display

according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.

The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,

computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.

Cannot add a device/destination.

A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase

unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new

devices/destinations (=

156).

Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=

144).

To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on

your smartphone (=

134).

To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer. Also

check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (=

138, =

140).

Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as

microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the

2.4 GHz band.

Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as

the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

Cannot connect to the access point.

Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the

camera (=

204). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to

specify a supported channel manually.

186

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back

MOV/Cannot play back MP4

Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.

It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a

computer, or images shot with another camera.

Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/

Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identication

information

The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or

already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that

starred (*) functions are not available for movies.

Edit ID Info* (=

111), Magnify* (=

112), Rotate* (=

117), Favorites (=

118),

Edit* (=

121), Print List* (=

179), and Photobook Set-up* (=

181).

Invalid selection range

When specifying a range for image selection (=

114, =

117, =

180), you

attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.

Exceeded selection limit

More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=

179) or Photobook Set-up

(=

181). Choose 998 images or less.

Print List (=

179) or Photobook Set-up (=

181) settings could not be saved

correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.

You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=

113), Erase

(=

115), Favorites (=

118), Print List (=

179), or Photobook Set-up (=

181).

Naming error!

The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the

highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been

reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders

has been reached. On the [ 1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]

(=

159), or format the memory card (=

160).

Lens Error

This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is

used in dusty or sandy locations.

Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this

case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

On-Screen Messages

If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.

Shooting or Playback

No memory card

The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory

card facing the correct way (=

19).

Memory card locked

The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch

the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (=

19).

Cannot record!

Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a

memory card facing the correct way (=

19).

Memory card error (=

160)

If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a

supported memory card (=

2) and have inserted it facing the correct way

(=

19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Insufcient space on card

There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (=

33, =

55,

=

73, =

92) or edit images (=

121). Either erase unneeded images

(=

115) or insert a memory card with enough free space (=

19).

Touch AF unavailable

Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (=

190).

Touch AF canceled

The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (=

86).

Charge the battery (=

18)

No Image.

The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.

Protected! (=

113)

187

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed

You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.

Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth

devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.

Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as

the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.

Sending failed

Memory card error

If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted

memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help

Desk.

Receiving failed

Insufcient space on card

There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to

receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a

memory card with sufcient space.

Receiving failed

Memory card locked

The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images

is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked

position.

Receiving failed

Naming error!

When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)

have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.

Insufcient space on server

Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create

space.

Save the images sent via Image Sync (=

152) to your computer.

Check network settings

Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current

network settings.

A camera error was detected (error number)

If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not

have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.

Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this

case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support

Help Desk.

File Error

Correct printing (=

175) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or

images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is

connected to the printer.

Print error

Check the paper size setting (=

177). If this error message is displayed when

the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera

again.

Ink absorber full

Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink

absorber replacement.

Wi-Fi

Connection failed

No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=

140).

A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the

connection.

Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.

Cannot determine access point

The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try

reconnecting again.

No access points found

Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.

When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the

correct SSID.

Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings

Check the access point security settings (=

140).

IP address conict

Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.

188

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

(20) AE lock (=

74), FE lock

(=

89)

(21) AF frame (=

83), Spot AE point

frame (=

74)

(22) Control ring function switching

(=

96)

(23) Manual focus switching (=

81)

(24) Grid lines (=

98)

(25) Shutter speed (=

92, =

93)

(26) Aperture value (=

93, =

93)

(27) Electronic level (=

50)

(28) Exposure level (=

93)

(29) ISO speed (=

75)

(30) DR correction (=

77)

(31) Hybrid Auto mode (=

35)

(32) Star Emphasis (=

64)

(33) High ISO NR (=

76)

(34) Eco mode (=

161)

(35) Self-timer (=

40)

(36) Camera shake warning (=

36)

(37) Zoom bar (=

33)

(38) Blink detection (=

51)

(39) Manual focus (=

81)

(40) Flash exposure compensation

/ Flash output level (=

88,

=

95)

(41) Exposure compensation (=

74)

(42) Wind filter (=

36, =

70)

(43) Time zone (=

162)

(44) Image stabilization (=

52)

(45) Auto Level (=

51)

(46) Auto Slow Shutter (=

70)

(47) Attenuator (=

71)

* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.

Battery Level

An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.

Display Details

Sufcient charge

Slightly depleted, but sufcient

(Blinking red) Nearly depleted—charge the battery

pack soon

[Charge the battery] Depleted—charge the battery pack

immediately

On-Screen Information

Shooting (Information Display)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(8)

(7)

34

)

(

10

)(

11

)(

12

) (

13

)(

14

) (

15

) (

16

) (

17

)

(

18

)

(

19

)

(

21

)

(

39

)

(

38

)

(

41

)(

40

)

(

25

)

31

)

36

)

(

26

) (

28

)(

27

) (

29

)

(

45

) (

46

)

(

20

)

(

22

)

(9)

(

23

)

(

24

)

(

30

)

(9)

32

)

(

20

)

33

)

35

)

(

47

)(

42

) (

43

) (

44

)

(1) Shooting mode (=

190), Scene

icon (=

37)

(2) Flash mode (=

87)

(3) Shadow correction (=

77)

(4) Metering method (=

74)

(5) ND filter (=

77)

(6) Drive mode (=

42), AEB

shooting (=

76), Focus

bracketing (=

82)

(7) White balance (=

78), Mercury

lamp correction (=

48)

(8) My Colors (=

79)

(9) Touch Shutter (=

42)

(10) IS mode icon (=

38)

(11) Battery level (=

188)

(12) Still image compression (=

90),

Recording pixel setting (=

90)

(13) Recordable shots (=

205)*

(14) Zoom magnification (=

39),

Digital tele-converter (=

83)

(15) Movie quality (=

49)

(16) Remaining time (=

206)

(17) Histogram (=

105)

(18) Quick Set menu (=

28)

(19) Focus range (=

80, =

81),

AF lock (=

87)

189

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

(30) Image quality / Frame rate

(movies) (=

49)

(31) Group playback (=

110)

(32) Compression (image quality)

(=

90) / Recording pixel

setting (=

49), Digest movies

(=

35), RAW (=

90), MP4

(movies), Albums (=

127)

(33) Still images: Recording pixel

setting (=

205)

Movies: Playback time (=

206)

(34) File size

Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on

a TV (=

170).

Summary of Movie Control Panel

The following operations are available on the movie control panel,

accessed as described in “Viewing” (=

103).

Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to

adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.

Play

Slow Motion (Touch [ ][ ] to adjust the playback speed. No sound

is played.)

Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=

126) (To continue skipping

backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)

Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ] button.)

Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)

Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=

126) (To continue skipping

forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)

Erase Clip (Displayed when any of the following is selected: digest

movies (=

106), Creative Shot movies (=

106), or albums

without background music (=

128).)

Edit (=

125)

Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible

printer (=

175).

* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.

Playback (Detailed Information Display)

(4) (5) (6)(7) (8)(9)(

10

)(

11

) (

12

) (

13

)

(

14

) (

15

) (

16

) (

17

) (

18

)

(

19

)

(

26

) (

28

) (

30

) (

32

)

(

) (

) (

)

(

33

) (

34

)

(

20

) (

21

) (

22

) (

23

) (

24

) (

25

)

(1) Movies (=

33, =

103)

(2) Digest movies (=

106)

(3) Group playback (=

110)

(4) Current image no. / Total no. of

images

(5) Histogram (=

105)

(6) Battery level (=

188)

(7) Wi-Fi signal strength (=

151)

(8) Image Sync (=

152)

(9) Image editing (=

121), Movie

compression (=

126)

(10) Favorites (=

118)

(11) Protection (=

113)

(12) Folder number — File number

(=

159)

(13) Shooting date/time (=

20)

(14) Shooting mode (=

190)

(15) Shutter speed (=

92, =

93)

(16) Aperture value (=

93, =

93)

(17) Exposure compensation level

(=

74)

(18) ISO speed (=

75)

(19) Metering method (=

74)

(20) Flash (=

87), Flash exposure

compensation (=

88)

(21) White balance (=

78)

(22) White balance correction

(=

78), Mercury lamp

correction (=

48

), Creative Shot

effect (=

56)

(23) My Colors (=

79, =

123)

(24) Focus range (=

80, =

81)

(25) ND filter (=

77)

(26) Red-eye correction (=

124),

Short clip playback effect

(=

71)

(27) High ISO NR (=

76)

(28) DR correction (=

77)

(29) Shadow correction (=

77)

190

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Bracketing (=

76, =

82)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Drive Mode (=

42)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Flash (=

87)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Functions and Menu Tables

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode

Icons in black, such as , indicate that the function is available or

automatically set in that shooting mode.

Gray icons, such as , indicate that the function is unavailable in that

shooting mode.

Exposure Compensation (=

74)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

ISO Speed (=

75)

Auto

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

125 – 12800

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

AF Operation (=

85)

ONE SHOT

*1 / / / / / / *2 / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

SERVO

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

191

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure Compensation (=

69)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button (=

87))

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Focus Range (=

80, =

81)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Manual Focus Switching When Recording Movies (=

69)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Move AF Frame (=

84)

Center

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Periphery

*1 / / / / / / / / / / *5 / *5 /

*5 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/

Touch AF (=

86)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / *5 / *5 /

*5 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/

*1 / / / / / *3 / *3 / / / / / / /

*3 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Flash Exposure Compensation (=

88)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Flash Output Level (=

95)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Av/Tv Settings (=

92, =

93)

Aperture Value

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Shutter Speed

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Bulb Setting

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Program Shift (=

74)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

AE Lock/FE Lock in Standby (=

74, =

89)*4

*1 / *6 / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

192

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Quick Set Menu

AF method (=

83)

+Tracking

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

1-point AF

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Image quality

For details, see “Shooting Tab” (=

195).

Movie Quality (=

49, =

49)

When Set to NTSC

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / *2 / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / *2 / / / / / / / / / /

Face Select (=

86)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Touch Shutter (=

42)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*7 / / / *6 / / / / / / / / / / /

Change Display (=

27)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 [SERVO] when subject movement is detected.

*3 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.

*4 FE lock not available in [ ] ash mode.

*5 Only when [ ] is selected.

*6 Only available when faces are detected.

*7 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.

193

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

ND Filter (=

77)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Still Image Aspect Ratio (=

47)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / *5 / / *5 /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

White Balance (=

78)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

When Set to PAL

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / *2 / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / *2 / / / / / / / / / /

Self-Timer (=

40)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Self-Timer Settings (=

41)

Delay*3

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Shots*4

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

194

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Shadow Correct (=

77)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Light Metering (=

74)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=

60).

*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.

*4 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of

shots.

*5 Automatically set, matching the aspect ratio specied in [Movie rec. size].

*6 White balance is not available.

*7 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,

and skin tone.

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

WB Correction (=

78)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Color Adjustment (=

68)

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

My Colors (=

79)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / *6 / *6 / / / / / / / *7

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

DR Correction (=

77)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

195

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Shooting Tab

[ 1] Tab

Rec. Mode (=

57, =

58, =

69)

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Image quality (=

48, =

90)

JPEG

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

RAW

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Still Image Aspect Ratio (=

47)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

Shooting information display (=

98)

Screen info/ toggle settings

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Grid display

Grid 1 /Grid 2

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Histogram

Brightness/RGB

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

196

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Touch shutter icon

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Face ID Settings (=

43)

On/Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Set button (=

99)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Control Ring Settings (=

97)

Switch with

On/Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Set Function

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Quick setting menu layout (=

100)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Save Settings (=

101)

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Review image after shooting (=

54)

Display Time

Off/Quick

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Hold

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Display Info

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Detailed

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

[ 2] Tab

Touch Shutter (=

42)

Touch Shutter

Enable

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Disable

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

197

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

AF Frame Size (=

84)*2

Normal

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Small

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Continuous AF (=

85)

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Focus Range (=

80, =

81)

For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”

(=

190).

AF-assist Beam (=

53)

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Digital Zoom (=

39)

Standard

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Lock

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

1.6x/2.0x

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

[ 3] Tab

AF-Point Zoom (=

50)

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

AF operation (=

85)

For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”

(=

190).

AF method (=

83)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

198

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

IS Settings (=

52)

IS Mode

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Continuous

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Shoot Only

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Dynamic IS

Low

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Standard

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

High

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Auto level

Enable

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Disable

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

[ 4] Tab

MF-Point Zoom (=

81)

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

2x/4x

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Safety MF (=

81)

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

MF Peaking Settings (=

82)

Peaking

On/Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Level

Low/High

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Color

Red/Yellow/Blue

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

199

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Flash Exp. Comp

For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”

(=

190).

Flash Output

For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”

(=

190).

Shutter Sync.

1st-curtain

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

2nd-curtain

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Red-Eye Lamp

On/Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Safety FE

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Save Stills (=

66)

On/Off

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Bracketing (=

76, =

82)

For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”

(=

190).

[ 5] Tab

ISO speed (=

76)

Max ISO Speed

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Rate of Change

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

DR Correction (=

77)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

Shadow Correct (=

77)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

Light Metering (=

74)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

ND Filter (=

77)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

Flash Settings (=

53, =

88, =

89, =

95)

Flash Mode

Auto

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Manual

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

200

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

[ 6] Tab

White Balance (=

78)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

WB Correction (=

78)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

My Colors (=

123)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

High ISO NR (=

76)

Low/Standard/High

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Hg Lamp Corr. (=

48)

On/Off

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Spot AE Point (=

74)

Center/AF Point

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Safety Shift (=

93)

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Star Emphasis (=

64)

Sharp/Off/Soft

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (=

66)

Effect

/ / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Shot Interval

15 sec./30 sec./1 min.

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Frame Rate

/ (NTSC), / (PAL)

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Shooting Time

60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

201

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Auto

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Auto slow shutter (=

70)

Enable

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Disable

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].

*3 [Enable] for functions other than Creative Zone and movies.

[ 7] Tab

Blink Detection (=

51)

On

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Digest Type (=

35)

Include Stills/No Stills

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

[ 8] Tab

Movie Quality (=

49)

For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (=

192).

Wind Filter (=

70)

Auto

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Attenuator (=

71)

On/Off

*1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /

202

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Tab Item Reference

Page

4

Touch Operation =

164

Screen auto-lock settings =

165

Units =

165

Wi-Fi Settings =

131

Mobile Device Connect Button =

134

Certication Logo Display =

165

Copyright Info =

165

5Reset All =

166

My Menu Tab

Tab Item Reference

Page

1My Menu settings =

101

Playback Tab

Tab Item Reference

Page

1

Protect =

113

Rotate =

117

Erase =

115

Favorites =

118

Slideshow =

113

Set Up Tab

Tab Item Reference

Page

1

Create Folder =

159

File Numbering =

159

Format =

160

Video system =

160

Electronic Level =

50

Start-up Image =

164

2

Eco Mode =

161

Power Saving =

26

Disp. Brightness =

162

Night Display =

161

Time Zone =

162

Date/Time =

163

Lens Retraction =

163

3

Language =

163

Mute =

163

Volume =

164

Sound Options =

164

Hints & Tips =

164

Mode icon size/info =

164

203

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Handling Precautions

The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or

subjecting it to strong impact.

Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that

generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction

or erase image data.

If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with

a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply

force.

Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera

or screen.

Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,

contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden

temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to

warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic

bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it

from the bag.

If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.

Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove

the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has

evaporated before resuming use.

Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To

maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for

some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until

it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.

Tab Item Reference

Page

2

Story Highlights =

127

List/Play Digest Movies =

106

Play Creative Shot Movies =

106

Short Clip Mix =

130

Image Search =

108

3

i-Contrast =

123

Resize =

121

Cropping =

122

Red-Eye Correction =

124

My Colors =

123

Face ID Info =

107

4Print settings =

176

Photobook Set-up =

181

5

Transition Effect =

103

Index Effect =

107

Scroll Display =

103

Group Images =

110

Auto Rotate =

118

Resume =

103

Image jump with =

109

6Set Touch Actions =

119

204

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Built-in Flash

Metering Range (Wide angle end) ….50 cm – 6.0 m (1.6 – 20 ft.)

Metering Range (Telephoto end) ……50 cm – 2.4 m (1.6 – 7.9 ft.)

Shutter Speed

Auto Mode (Auto Settings)…………….1 – 1/2000 sec.

Other Modes Combined………………..30 – 1/2000 sec., bulb supported

Aperture

f/number…………………………………….. 2.0 – 11 (W)

4.9 – 11 (T)

AF Type ………………………………………… 1-point, Face+Tracking

(AF points: up to 31)

File Format …………………………………….. Design rule for Camera File

system, DPOF (version 1.1)

compliant

Data Type (Still Images)

Image File Format………………………..Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)

Image Formats……………………………. JPEG, RAW (CR2, a Canon 14-bit

RAW format)

Data Type (Movies)

Recording Format ……………………….. MP4

Video ………………………………………….MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Audio………………………………………….MPEG-4 AAC LC (stereo)

Power Source

Battery Pack ……………………………….NB-13L

Charging via USB ……………………….. Using Compact Power Adapter

CA-DC30/CA-DC30E

AC Adapter Kit …………………………….ACK-DC110

Interface

Wired …………………………………………USB (Micro-B), HDMI (Type D)

Wireless …………………………………….. Specications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n

Frequency: 2.4 GHz

Channels: 1 – 11

Security: WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/

TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)

Specications

Camera

Image Sensor

Camera Effective Pixels

(Image processing may cause

a decrease in the number of pixels.) …….Approx. 20.2 million pixels

Total Pixels………………………………….Approx. 20.9 million pixels

Image Size …………………………………. 1.0 type

Lens

Focal Length

(35mm lm equivalent) …………………….. 10.2 – 30.6 mm (28 – 84 mm)

Zoom Factor ……………………………….3x

Digital Zoom

Maximum with Optical Zoom …………Approx. 12x

Focal Length

(Telephoto end, 35mm lm equivalent) …..Equivalent to approx. 336 mm

ZoomPlus

(L size) ………………………….……………..Approx. 6.0x

Screen (Monitor)

Type ………………………………………….. Color TFT LCD

Screen Size ………………………………..3.0-type

Effective Pixels ……………………………Approx. 1,040,000 dots

Continuous Shooting

Speed

(Varies depending on the subject,

zoom position, and other shooting

factors, as well as memory card

brands.) ……………………………………… One-Shot AF:

Approx. 6.0 shots/sec.

Servo AF: Approx. 4.3 shots/sec.

205

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Shooting Range

Shooting

Mode

Focus

Range

Maximum Wide Angle

()

Maximum Telephoto

( )

5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 35 cm (1.1 ft.) – innity

Other

modes

5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 35 cm (1.1 ft.) – innity

*5 – 50 cm

(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)

*5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 35 cm (1.1 ft.) – innity

* Not available in some shooting modes.

Number of Shots per Memory Card

The number of shots at an aspect ratio (=

47) of 3:2 per memory card is

as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect ratio.

Number of shots per 16 GB memory card (approx. shots)

1786

2999

2857

4810

8377

14724

48592

69418

RAW 610

The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and

may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.

Operating Environment

Temperatures ………………………………0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

Dimensions (WxHxD) ……………………… 98.0 x 57.9 x 30.8 mm

(3.86 x 2.28 x 1.21 in.)

Weight

Including Battery Pack,

Memory Card ………………………………Approx. 209 g (7.37 oz.)

Camera Only……………………………….Approx. 185 g (6.53 oz.)

Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback

Time

Number of Shots Approx. 220

Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 335

Movie Recording Time (Actual Use)*1Approx. 55 minutes

Movie Recording Time

(Continuous Shooting)*2Approx. 1 hour 30 minutes

Playback Time*3Approx. 5 hours

*1 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:

— In [ ] mode, with all other settings set to defaults

— With recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off

*2 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:

— In [ ] mode, with all other settings set to defaults

Automatically stop/resume after the time or capacity per recording is reached

*3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.

206

Before Use

Index

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Battery Pack NB-13L

Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC

Nominal Capacity: 1250 mAh

Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times

Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE

Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)

Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A

Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)

Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)

Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E

Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)

Rated Output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A

Charging Time: Approx. 5 hr.*

(when charged with NB-13L in the camera)

* Charging time varies greatly depending on the

remaining battery level.

Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)

Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on

measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products

Association (CIPA).

Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording

time may be less than mentioned above.

Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.

Recording Time per Memory Card

Size Frame Rate/

Video System

Recording Time

per 16 GB Memory

Card (Approx.)

Recording Time

for Individual

Movies (Approx.)

(1920 x 1080)

(NTSC)

(PAL) 59 min. 30 sec. 10 min.

,

(NTSC)

(PAL)

1 hr. 26 min. 05 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.

(1280 x 720)

(NTSC)

(PAL) 4 hr. 05 min. 15 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.

(640 x 480)

(NTSC)

(PAL)

10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec.

1 hr.

The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions

and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera

settings.

Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards

rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards

rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop

automatically when the le size reaches 4 GB, or when the card

becomes full.

207

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Index

Index

A

AC adapter kit 168, 171

Accessories 168

AEB shooting 76

AE lock 74

AF frames 83

AF lock 87

AF method 83

Aspect ratio 47

AUTO mode (shooting mode) 22, 33

Av (shooting mode) 93

B

Background defocus (shooting mode)

61

Batteries Date/time (date/time

battery)

Battery charger 2, 168

Battery pack

Charging 18

Eco mode 161

Level 188

Power saving 26

Black and white images 79

Blink detection 51

C

C (shooting mode) 98

Camera

Reset all 166

Camera access point mode 138

Camera Connect 132

CameraWindow 173

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 144

Clock 32

Color (white balance) 78

Compression 90

Connecting via an access point 140

Continuous shooting 38, 42

Control ring 97

Control ring function selector button

97

Creative shot 55

Cropping 122, 177

Custom white balance 78

D

Date/time

Changing 21

Date/time battery 21

Settings 20

World clock 162

DC coupler 171

Defaults Reset all

Digital tele-converter 83

Digital zoom 39

Display language 21

DPOF 179

Dragging 17

Dynamic Range Correction 77

E

Eco mode 161

Editing

Cropping 122

i-Contrast 123

My Colors 123

Red-eye correction 124

Resizing images 121

Editing or erasing connection

information 156

Electronic level 50

Erasing 115

Erasing all 116

Error messages 186

Exposure

AE lock 74

Compensation 74

FE lock 89

F

Face ID 43

Face select 86

Favorites 118

FE lock 89

File numbering 159

Fireworks (shooting mode) 57

Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 59

Flash

Deactivating ash 88

Flash exposure compensation 88

On 87

Slow synchro 88

Focus bracketing 82

Focus check 112

Focusing

AF frames 83

AF lock 87

AF-point zoom 50

MF peaking 82

Servo AF 85

Touch AF 86

Focus lock 83

Focus range

Macro 80

Manual focus 81

G

Geotagging images 155

GPS information display 105

Grid lines 98

H

Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)

57

HDMI cable 170

High dynamic range (shooting mode)

58

High ISO NR 76

Household power 171

Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 35

I

i-Contrast 123

iFrame movies (movie mode) 72

Image quality Compression ratio

(image quality)

Images

Display period 54

Erasing 115

Playback Viewing

Protecting 113

Image stabilization 52, 91

Image Sync 152

Indicator 31, 53

ISO speed 75

J

Jump display 109

M

M (shooting mode) 93

Macro (focus range) 80

Magnied display 112

208

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Index

Soft focus (shooting mode) 62

Software

Installation 138, 174

Saving images to a computer

174

Sounds 163

Standard (movie mode) 69

Star (shooting mode) 63

Star nightscape (shooting mode)

64

Star time-lapse movie (shooting

mode) 66

Star trails (shooting mode) 65

Story Highlights 127

Strap 2, 18

Super vivid (shooting mode) 58

T

Terminal 170, 175

Touch Actions 119

Touch AF 86

Touching 17

Touch-screen panel 17

Touch Shutter 42

Toy camera effect (shooting mode)

61

Traveling with the camera 162

Troubleshooting 182

TV display 170

Tv (shooting mode) 92

V

Viewing 23

Image search 108

Index display 107

Jump display 109

Magnied display 112

Single-image display 23

Slideshow 113

TV display 170

W

White balance (color) 78

Wi-Fi functions 131

Wi-Fi menu 136

Wind lter 36

World clock 162

Wrist strap Strap

Z

Zoom 22, 34, 39, 40

Manual focus (focus range) 81

Manual (movie mode) 95

Memory cards 2

Recording time 206

Menu

Basic operations 29

Table 190

Mercury lamp correction 48

Metering method 74

Miniature effect (shooting mode) 60

Mobile device connection button 134

Monochrome (shooting mode) 62

Movies

Editing 125

Image quality (recording pixels/

frame rate) 49

Recording time 206

Multi-area White Balance 48

My Colors 79, 123

N

ND lter 77

Nostalgic (shooting mode) 59

P

P (shooting mode) 73

Package contents 2

Photobook set-up 181

PictBridge 169, 175

Playback Viewing

Portrait (shooting mode) 57

Poster effect (shooting mode) 58

Power 168 AC adapter kit,

Battery charger, Battery pack

Power saving 26

Printing 175

Program AE 73

Protecting 113

Q

Quick Set menu

Table 192

R

RAW 90

Recording pixels (image size) 48, 90

Red-eye correction 124

Remote shooting 155

Reset all 166

Resizing images 121

Rotating 117

S

Saving images to a computer 174

Screen

Display language 21

Icons 188, 189

Menu Quick Set menu, Menu

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

Memory cards

Searching 108

Self-timer 40

2-second self-timer 41

Customizing the self-timer 41

Sending images 149

Sending images to another camera

149

Sending images to a smartphone 132

Sending images to Web services 144

Sepia tone images 79

Servo AF 85

Shadow correction 77

Shooting

Shooting date/time Date/time

Shooting information 98, 188

Short clips (movie mode) 71

Slideshow 113

209

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Index

Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions

Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use

Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal

use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid

violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where

use is allowed.

Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from

use in other countries and regions.

Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:

Altering or modifying the product

Removing the certication labels from the product

According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,

export permission (or service transaction permission) from the

Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or

services (including this product) outside Japan.

Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls

under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported

to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.

Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.

The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be

erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio

waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make

notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that

Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss

of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.

When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or

sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and

reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.

Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or

theft of the product.

Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from

unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this

product due to loss or theft of the product.

Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.

Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the

guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for

damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other

than as described in this guide.

Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical

equipment or other electronic equipment.

Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other

electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.

Radio Wave Interference Precautions

This product may receive interference from other devices that emit

radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far

away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the

same time as this product.

Security Precautions

Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions

more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.

Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.

Only use networks you are authorized to use.

This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays

the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use

(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to

connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized

access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and

do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.

210

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and C Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Before Use

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Index

Trademarks and Licensing

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.

The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.

The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™

are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.

in the United States and in other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard

and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or

decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for

a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider

licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant

video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4

standard.

Disclaimer

Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.

All measurements based on Canon testing standards.

Information subject to change without notice, as are product

specications and appearance.

Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the

actual equipment.

The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any

loss arising from the use of this product.

If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may

occur.

Transmission monitoring

Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions

and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.

Unauthorized network access

Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to

the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.

Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access

such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain

access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where

someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard

to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).

To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly

secure your Wi-Fi network.

Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of

Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security

settings.

The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers

via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy

to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices

directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS

over IP enables PictBridge connections in network

environments, and the camera is also compatible with

this standard.

Руководство пользователя камеры

Перед началом работы с камерой обязательно ознакомьтесь с данным Руководством, включая раздел «Меры предосторожности» (= 14).

Ознакомление с данным Руководством поможет научиться правильному обращению с камерой.

Храните это Руководство в надежном месте, чтобы его можно было использовать в будущем.

Для перехода на другие страницы нажимайте кнопки в правом нижнем углу.

: следующая страница

: предыдущая страница

: страница до нажатия ссылки

Для перехода в начало главы нажмите название главы справа.

РУССКИЙ

© CANON INC. 2015

CEL-SW2MA200

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

1

Перед использованием

Начальные сведения

Комплект поставки

Перед использованием проверьте наличие в комплекте поставки камеры перечисленных ниже комплектующих.

Если что-либо отсутствует, обращайтесь по месту приобретения камеры.

Камера

Аккумулятор

NB-13L*

Зарядное устройство

Ремень для запястья

CB-2LH/CB-2LHE

* Запрещается удалять с аккумулятора наклеенную на него оболочку.

●● В комплект поставки также входят печатные документы. ●● Карта памяти не входит в комплект поставки (=2).

Поддерживаемые карты памяти

Могут использоваться указанные ниже карты памяти (продаются отдельно), независимо от их емкости.

●● Карты памяти SD*1

●● Карты памяти SDHC*1*2

●● Карты памяти SDXC*1*2

*1 Карты, соответствующие стандартам SD. Однако работа с данной камерой проверена не для всех карт памяти.

*2 Также поддерживаются карты памяти UHS-I.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

2

Предварительные замечания и юридическая

информация

●● Сначала снимите и проверьте несколько тестовых снимков, чтобы убедиться

вправильности их записи. Обратите внимание на то, что компания Canon Inc., ее филиалы и дочерние компании, а также дистрибьюторы не несут никакой ответственности за любой ущерб, обусловленный какой-либо неисправностью камеры и ее принадлежностей (включая карты памяти), приводящей к сбою

взаписи изображения или к записи изображения не тем способом, на который рассчитан аппарат.

●● Законодательство некоторых стран допускает использование фотографий, а также защищенной авторскими правами музыки или изображений с музыкой, хранящихся на карте памяти, только для личных целей. Не производите несанкционированную съемку, нарушающую законы об охране авторских прав, и обратите внимание, что фотосъемка даже для личного использования, производимая на представлениях и выставках, а также в некоторых коммерческих ситуациях, может нарушать автор­ ские права или другие юридические права.

●● Условия гарантии на камеру и сведения о службе поддержки клиентов компании Canon приведены в гарантийной информации в комплекте руководств пользо­ вателя камеры.

●● Хотя экран изготавливается с использованием высокопрецизионных технологий и более 99,99% пикселов соответствуют техническим требованиям, в редких случаях отдельные пикселы могут иметь дефекты или отображаться в виде красных или черных точек. Это не свидетельствует о повреждении камеры и не влияет на запи­ сываемые изображения.

●● При длительном использовании камеры она может стать теплой. Это не является признаком неисправности.

Соглашения, принятые в данном Руководстве

Перед использованием

Основные операции

●●

В данном Руководстве значки служат для обозначения кнопок и дисков камеры,

на которые эти значки нанесены или на которые они похожи.

●● Значками обозначаются следующие кнопки и органы управления камеры. Цифры

Руководство по расширенным операциям

в скобках показывают номер соответствующего элемента управления в разделе

«Названия компонентов» (=4).

Основные сведения о камере

[ ] Кольцо управления (10) на передней панели

●●

Режимы съемки, а также значки и текст, отображаемые на экране, указываются

Автоматический/гибридный

в скобках.

автоматический режим

●● : Важные сведения, которые следует знать

●● : Примечания и советы для квалифицированного использования камеры

●●

: Обозначает операции с сенсорным экраном

●●

=xx: Страницы со связанной информацией (в этом примере символы «xx»

означают номер страницы)

●● Инструкции данного Руководства относятся к камере с настройками по умолчанию.

●● Для удобства все поддерживаемые карты памяти обозначаются просто как «карта памяти».

●● Символы « Фотографии» и « Видеофильмы» под заголовками указывают, как используется функция – для фотографий или видеофильмов.

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

3

Canon PowerShot G9 X User Manual

Названия компонентов

(5) (6) (7)

(9) (10) (12) (3)

(8)

(11)

(4)

(13)(14)

(16) (17)

(3)

(2)

(15)

(1)

(1)

Объектив

(9)

Кнопка [

(Воспроизведение)]

(2)

Лампа

(10)

Кольцо управления

(3)

Крепление ремня

(11)

Вспышка

(4)

Рычаг зумирования

(12)

Кнопка [

(Подключение мобильного

Съемка: [

(положение телефото)]/

устройства)]

[

(широкоугольное

(13)

Серийный номер (номер корпуса)

положение)]

(14)

(N-метка)*1

Воспроизведение: [

(увеличение)]/

[

(индекс)]

(15)

Штативное гнездо

(5)

Диск установки режима

(16)

Крышка гнезда карты памяти/отсека

(6)

Кнопка спуска затвора

элементов питания

(7)

Кнопка ON/OFF

(17)

Крышка переходника постоянного тока

(8)Динамик

Перед использованием

Основные операции

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный

(7)

автоматический режим

(8)

Другие режимы съемки

(9)

Режим P

(10)

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

(1)

Переключатель [ (Подъем вспышки)]

(6)

Кнопка видеосъемки

(2)

Экран*2

(7)

Кнопка [

(Меню быстрой установки/

Функции Wi-Fi

(3)

Микрофон

Установка)]

Меню настройки

(4)

Разъем DIGITAL

(8)

Кнопка [

]

(5)

Разъем HDMI™

(9)

Индикатор/лампа заряда по USB

Принадлежности

(10)

Кнопка [

(Информация)]

*1

Используется с функциями NFC (=132).

Приложение

*2

При установке защиты экрана эффективность распознавания жестов может ухудшиться.

В таком случае увеличьте чувствительность сенсорного экрана (=164).

Алфавитный указатель

4

Содержание

Перед использованием

Начальные сведения…………………………………………………………………….

2

Комплект поставки……………………………………………………………………………..

2

Поддерживаемые карты памяти………………………………………………………….

2

Предварительные замечания и юридическая информация……………………

3

Соглашения, принятые в данном Руководстве.…………………………………….

3

Названия компонентов.………………………………………………………………………

4

Обычные операции с камерой.………………………………………………………….

12

Меры предосторожности…………………………………………………………………..

14

Основные операции

Основные операции……………………………………………………………………

17

Использование сенсорного экрана.…………………………………………………..

17

Нажатие………………………………………………………………………………………………

17

Перетаскивание…………………………………………………………………………………..

17

Начальная подготовка.……………………………………………………………………..

18

Закрепление ремня……………………………………………………………………………..

18

Как правильно держать камеру…………………………………………………………….

18

Зарядка аккумулятора…………………………………………………………………………

18

Установка аккумулятора и вашей карты памяти…………………………………….

19

Извлечение аккумулятора и карты памяти………………………………………..

20

Установка даты и времени……………………………………………………………………

20

Изменение даты и времени……………………………………………………………..

21

Язык……………………………………………………………………………………………………

21

Опробование камеры………………………………………………………………………..

22

Съемка (Smart Auto)…………………………………………………………………………….

22

Просмотр……………………………………………………………………………………………

23

Стирание изображений……………………………………………………………………

24

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере…………………………………………………….

25

Включение и выключение………………………………………………………………….

25

Функции экономии энергии (Автовыключение).…………………………………….

26

Экономия энергии в режиме съемки………………………………………………..

26

Экономия энергии в режиме воспроизведения.………………………………..

26

Кнопка спуска затвора.…………………………………………………………………….

26

Режимы съемки………………………………………………………………………………..

27

Варианты индикации при съемке……………………………………………………….

27

Использование меню быстрой установки……………………………………………

28

Настройка параметров с помощью сенсорного экрана………………………….

28

Использование экрана меню.……………………………………………………………

29

Использование сенсорного экрана……………………………………………………….

30

Экранная клавиатура………………………………………………………………………..

30

Индикатор………………………………………………………………………………………..

31

Часы.……………………………………………………………………………………………….

32

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим………………..

33

Съемка с настройками, определенными камерой………………………………

33

Съемка (Smart Auto)…………………………………………………………………………….

33

Съемка в гибридном автоматическом режиме………………………………………

35

Запуск воспроизведения видеоподборки………………………………………….

36

Фотографии/видеофильмы.…………………………………………………………….

36

Фотографии……………………………………………………………………………………

36

Видеофильмы…………………………………………………………………………………

36

Значки сюжетов…………………………………………………………………………………..

37

Эпизоды, для которых производится серийная съемка……………………..

38

Значки стабилизации изображения………………………………………………………

38

Рамки на экране………………………………………………………………………………….

39

Часто используемые удобные функции………………………………………………

39

Дополнительное увеличение объектов (Цифровой зум).………………………..

39

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

5

Съемка с заранее установленными фокусными расстояниями

(Пошаговый зум).………………………………………………………………………………..

40

Использование таймера автоспуска……………………………………………………..

40

Использование таймера автоспуска для исключения

сотрясения камеры…………………………………………………………………………

41

Настройка таймера автоспуска………………………………………………………..

41

Съемка путем нажатия на экран (Съемка при касании).………………………..

42

Серийная съемка…………………………………………………………………………………

42

Отображение изображений во время воспроизведения.……………………

43

Использование функции идентификации лица…………………………………..

43

Личные сведения…………………………………………………………………………………

43

Регистрация информации функции идентификации лица……………………..

44

Съемка……………………………………………………………………………………………….

45

Проверка и редактирование зарегистрированной информации……………..

45

Перезапись и добавление информации о лице…………………………………

46

Удаление зарегистрированной информации.……………………………………

47

Функции настройки изображения………………………………………………………

47

Изменение формата кадра.…………………………………………………………………

47

Изменение качества изображения……………………………………………………….

48

Коррекция зеленоватых оттенков областей изображения

при освещении ртутными лампами……………………………………………………….

48

Изменение качества видеоизображения……………………………………………….

49

Для видеосистемы NTSC…………………………………………………………………

49

Для видеосистемы PAL.…………………………………………………………………..

49

Полезные функции съемки.………………………………………………………………

50

Использование электронного уровня.…………………………………………………..

50

Увеличение области, на которую произведена фокусировка………………….

50

Проверка наличия закрытых глаз…………………………………………………………

51

Отключение автоматического уровня……………………………………………………

51

Изменение настроек режима IS……………………………………………………………

52

Отключение стабилизации изображения………………………………………….

52

Съемка видеофильмов с объектами того же размера,

с которым они отображаются до начала съемки……………………………………

52

Настройка работы камеры…………………………………………………………………

53

Отключение подсветки для автофокусировки……………………………………….

53

Предотвращение включения лампы уменьшения эффекта

«красных глаз»…………………………………………………………………………………….

53

Изменение стиля отображения изображения после съемки……………………

54

Изменение времени отображения изображения после съемки………….

54

Изменение экрана, отображаемого после съемки…………………………….

54

Другие режимы съемки………………………………………………………………

55

Автоматическое применение эффектов (Творческий снимок)…………….

55

Съемка нескольких разных изображений для каждого кадра…………………

55

Выбор эффектов…………………………………………………………………………………

56

Съемка видеофильмов с различными эффектами………………………………..

56

Воспроизведение творческого видеофильма……………………………………

56

Определенные сюжеты……………………………………………………………………..

57

Применение специальных эффектов…………………………………………………

58

Съемка эпизодов с высокой контрастностью

(Высокий динамический диапазон).……………………………………………………..

58

Добавление художественных эффектов.………………………………………….

59

Съемка с выцветшими цветами (Эффект старины)……………………………….

59

Съемка с эффектом объектива «Рыбий глаз» (Эффект Рыбий глаз)……….

59

Снимки, напоминающие миниатюрные модели (Эффект миниатюры)…….

60

Скорость воспроизведения и приблизительное время

воспроизведения (для клипов длительностью 1 мин)………………………..

60

Съемка с эффектом игрушечной камеры

(Эффект игрушечной камеры)……………………………………………………………..

61

Выделение объектов (Размытие фона)………………………………………………….

61

Съемка с эффектом мягкого фокуса……………………………………………………

62

Съемка в монохромном режиме…………………………………………………………..

62

Специальные режимы для других целей…………………………………………….

63

Съемка звездного неба (Звезды)………………………………………………………….

63

Съемка людей на фоне звездного неба (Портрет на фоне звезд)………

63

Съемка ночных сцен под звездным небом (Звездное небо)………………

64

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

6

Съемка следов перемещения звезд (Звездный след).………………………

65

Съемка видеофильмов движения звезд

(Покадровая видеосъемка звезд).……………………………………………………

66

Настройка цветов.…………………………………………………………………………..

68

Настройка фокусировки.…………………………………………………………………

68

Съемка различных видеофильмов…………………………………………………….

69

Съемка видеофильмов в режиме [ ]………………………………………………….

69

Фиксация или изменение яркости изображения перед съемкой.……….

69

Отмена

медленного автоматического затвора…………………………………

70

Корректировка сильных сотрясений камеры.………………………………………..

70

Параметры звука…………………………………………………………………………………

70

Отключение фильтра шумов……………………………………………………………

70

Использование аттенюатора……………………………………………………………

71

Съемка коротких клипов………………………………………………………………………

71

Эффекты воспроизведения……………………………………………………………..

71

Съемка видеофильмов iFrame.…………………………………………………………….

72

Режим P………………………………………………………………………………………

73

Съемка в режиме программной автоэкспозиции (режим [P])………………

73

Яркость изображения (Экспозиция).………………………………………………….

74

Настройка яркости изображения (Компенсация экспозиции)…………………

74

Фиксация яркости изображения/экспозиции (Фиксация AE).…………………

74

Изменение способа экспозамера…………………………………………………………

74

Связывание рамки точечного замера автоэкспозиции

с рамкой автофокусировки.…………………………………………………………….

75

Изменение числа ISO………………………………………………………………………….

75

Регулировка автоматической настройки ISO.……………………………………

76

Изменение уровня шумоподавления

(Шумоподавление при высокой чувствительности ISO)………………………….

76

Автоматический брекетинг (съемка в режиме AEB)……………………………….

76

Коррекция динамического диапазона (Корр.д.диап.)………………………..

77

Коррекция темных участков.……………………………………………………………

77

Настройка параметров автоматического фильтра

нейтральной плотности………………………………………………………………………..

77

Цвета изображения…………………………………………………………………………..

78

Съемка с естественными цветами (Баланс белого)………………………………..

78

Пользовательский баланс белого.……………………………………………………

78

Ручная коррекция баланса белого……………………………………………………

78

Изменение цветовых тонов изображения (Мои цвета)……………………………

79

Ручная настройка.…………………………………………………………………………..

80

Диапазон съемки и фокусировка.……………………………………………………..

80

Съемка с близкого расстояния (Макро)………………………………………………..

80

Съемка в режиме ручной фокусировки…………………………………………………

81

Простое определение области фокусировки

(Выделение цветом MF)…………………………………………………………………..

82

Фокусировочная вилка (режим «Фокус-BKT»)…………………………………..

82

Цифровой телеконвертер…………………………………………………………………….

83

Выбор способа автофокусировки.………………………………………………………..

83

AF по одной точке.………………………………………………………………………….

83

Перемещение рамок автофокусировки и изменение

их размера (AF по одной точке)……………………………………………………….

84

+Слежение………………………………………………………………………………….

84

Съемка в режиме следящей автофокусировки.…………………………………….

85

Изменение настройки фокусировки……………………………………………………..

85

Выбор человека для фокусировки (Выбор лица)……………………………………

86

Выбор объектов для фокусировки (Тактильный АФ).……………………………..

86

Съемка с фиксацией автофокусировки.……………………………………………….

87

Вспышка.…………………………………………………………………………………………

87

Изменение режима вспышки.………………………………………………………………

87

Авто.………………………………………………………………………………………………

87

Вкл…………………………………………………………………………………………………

87

Замедл. синхр………………………………………………………………………………..

88

Откл……………………………………………………………………………………………….

88

Настройка компенсации экспозиции при съемке со вспышкой………………

88

Съемка с фиксатором FE.……………………………………………………………………

89

Изменение момента срабатывания вспышки…………………………………………

89

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

7

Прочие настройки.……………………………………………………………………………

90

Изменение качества изображения……………………………………………………….

90

Запись в формате RAW.………………………………………………………………….

90

С помощью меню……………………………………………………………………………

91

Изменение настроек режима IS……………………………………………………………

91

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C…………………………………………………………………..

92

Конкретные значения выдержки затвора (режим [Tv])…………………………

92

Конкретные значения диафрагмы (режим [Av])…………………………………..

93

Конкретные значения выдержки затвора и диафрагмы (режим [M]).……

93

Съемка с длительной выдержкой (Ручная выдержка)………………………….

94

Настройка мощности вспышки.…………………………………………………………

95

Съемка видеофильмов с определенными значениями

выдержки затвора и диафрагмы………………………………………………………..

95

Настройка органов управления и индикации………………………………………

96

Настройка параметров при переключения функций

кольца управления………………………………………………………………………………

96

Изменение настроек кольца управления.……………………………………………..

97

Функции, которые можно назначить кольцу управления.…………………..

97

Назначение функций кольцу управления………………………………………….

98

Настройка отображаемой информации.……………………………………………….

98

Настройка отображаемой информации.…………………………………………..

99

Назначение функций кнопке видеосъемки……………………………………………

99

Настройка меню быстрой установки…………………………………………………

100

Выбор пунктов для включения в меню…………………………………………………

100

Изменение порядка пунктов меню………………………………………………….

100

Сохранение параметров съемки………………………………………………………

101

Параметры, которые можно сохранить……………………………………………

101

Сохранение часто используемых пунктов меню съемки (Моё меню)……….

101

Режим воспроизведения………………………………………………………….

103

Просмотр.………………………………………………………………………………………

103

Переключение режимов отображения…………………………………………………

105

Предупреждение о передержке (для ярких участков изображения)………

105

Гистограмма.………………………………………………………………………………..

105

Гистограмма RGB, отображение информации GPS…………………………

105

Просмотр коротких видеофильмов, снятых в режиме

творческого снимка (творческие видеофильмы)………………………………….

106

Просмотр коротких видеофильмов, созданных при съемке

фотографий (видеоподборка)…………………………………………………………….

106

Просмотр по дате………………………………………………………………………….

106

Проверка людей, обнаруженных функцией идентификации лица…………

107

Обзор и фильтрация изображений…………………………………………………..

107

Переход между изображениями в индексе………………………………………….

107

Использование сенсорного экрана…………………………………………………

108

Поиск изображений, удовлетворяющих определенным условиям…………

108

Переход между изображениями с помощью кольца управления…………..

109

Использование сенсорного экрана…………………………………………………

110

Просмотр отдельных изображений из группы………………………………………

110

Редактирование информации функции идентификации лица……………

111

Изменение имен………………………………………………………………………………..

111

Удаление имен…………………………………………………………………………………..

111

Варианты просмотра изображений…………………………………………………..

112

Увеличение изображений…………………………………………………………………..

112

Использование сенсорного экрана…………………………………………………

112

Просмотр слайд-шоу………………………………………………………………………….

113

Защита изображений………………………………………………………………………

113

С помощью меню………………………………………………………………………………

113

Выбор изображений по одному…………………………………………………………..

114

Выбор диапазона……………………………………………………………………………….

114

Защита сразу всех изображений.……………………………………………………….

115

Снятие защиты сразу со всех изображений…………………………………….

115

Удаление изображений……………………………………………………………………

115

Удаление сразу нескольких изображений……………………………………………

116

Указание способа выбора………………………………………………………………

116

Выбор изображений по одному………………………………………………………

116

Выбор диапазона…………………………………………………………………………..

117

Задание сразу всех изображений…………………………………………………..

117

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

8

Поворот изображений……………………………………………………………………..

117

С помощью меню………………………………………………………………………………

117

Отключение автоматического поворота.……………………………………………..

118

Пометка изображений как избранных………………………………………………

118

С помощью меню………………………………………………………………………………

118

Удобное управление: жесты сенсорного экрана………………………………..

119

Использование функций, назначенных жестам сенсорного экрана………

119

Изменение функций для жестов сенсорного экрана.…………………………..

120

Назначаемые функции.…………………………………………………………………

120

Редактирование фотографий…………………………………………………………..

121

Изменение размера изображений………………………………………………………

121

С помощью меню………………………………………………………………………………

121

Кадрирование……………………………………………………………………………………

122

Изменение цветовых тонов изображения (Мои цвета)………………………….

123

Коррекция яркости изображения (i-Contrast).………………………………………

123

Коррекция «красных глаз»………………………………………………………………….

124

Редактирование видеофильмов……………………………………………………….

125

Уменьшение размера файлов…………………………………………………………….

126

Качество изображения сжатых видеозаписей.………………………………..

126

Удаление глав видеофильмов…………………………………………………………….

126

Просмотр альбомов (Яркие моменты)………………………………………………

127

Выбор тем для альбомов.………………………………………………………………

127

Добавление в альбомы музыкального сопровождения…………………………

128

Создание собственных альбомов……………………………………………………….

129

Объединение коротких клипов…………………………………………………………

130

Функции Wi-Fi……………………………………………………………………………

131

Доступные функции Wi-Fi………………………………………………………………..

131

Отправка изображений в смартфон…………………………………………………

132

Отправка изображений в NFC-совместимый смартфон.………………………

132

Подключение с помощью NFC, когда камера выключена

или находится в режиме съемки.……………………………………………………

132

Подключение с помощью NFC, когда камера находится

в режиме воспроизведения……………………………………………………………

134

Передача на смартфон, назначенный кнопке……………………………………..

134

Добавление смартфона с помощью меню Wi-Fi…………………………………..

136

Использование другой точки доступа………………………………………………….

137

Предыдущие точки доступа………………………………………………………………..

138

Сохранение изображений в компьютере…………………………………………..

138

Подготовка к регистрации компьютера……………………………………………….

138

Проверка компьютерной среды……………………………………………………..

138

Установка программного обеспечения……………………………………………

138

Настройка компьютера для подключения по Wi-Fi (только Windows).…….

139

Сохранение изображений в подключенном компьютере………………………

140

Проверка совместимости точки доступа…………………………………………

140

Использование WPS-совместимых точек доступа……………………………

140

Подключение к точкам доступа из списка.……………………………………..

142

Предыдущие точки доступа……………………………………………………………

143

Отправка изображений в зарегистрированную веб-службу……………….

144

Регистрация веб-служб………………………………………………………………………

144

Регистрация портала CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.……………………………..

144

Регистрация других веб-служб……………………………………………………….

146

Отправка изображений в веб-службы………………………………………………….

146

Беспроводная печать изображений на подключенном принтере………..

147

Отправка изображений в другую камеру.…………………………………………

149

Варианты отправки изображений.……………………………………………………

150

Отправка нескольких изображений…………………………………………………….

150

Выбор изображений по одному………………………………………………………

150

Выбор диапазона…………………………………………………………………………..

150

Отправка избранных изображений.………………………………………………..

151

Примечания по отправке изображений.………………………………………………

151

Выбор разрешения (размер изображения)………………………………………….

152

Добавление комментариев…………………………………………………………………

152

Автоматическая отправка изображений

(Синхронизация изображений).……………………………………………………….

152

Начальная подготовка………………………………………………………………………..

152

Подготовка камеры.………………………………………………………………………

152

Подготовка компьютера…………………………………………………………………

153

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

9

Отправка изображений………………………………………………………………………

154

Просмотр на смартфоне изображений, отправленных

с помощью функции синхронизации изображений………………………….

154

Просмотр изображений из камеры и управление камерой

с помощью смартфона……………………………………………………………………

155

Геопривязка изображений в камере……………………………………………………

155

Дистанционная съемка.……………………………………………………………………..

155

Изменение или удаление параметров Wi-Fi.…………………………………….

156

Изменение информации о подключении.……………………………………………

156

Изменение имени устройства………………………………………………………..

157

Удаление информации о подключении…………………………………………..

157

Изменение имени камеры……………………………………………………………..

157

Восстановление значений по умолчанию для параметров Wi-Fi……………

158

Меню настройки……………………………………………………………………….

159

Настройка основных функций камеры……………………………………………..

159

Сохранение изображений на основе даты.………………………………………….

159

Нумерация файлов.…………………………………………………………………………..

159

Форматирование карт памяти…………………………………………………………….

160

Низкоуровневое форматирование………………………………………………….

160

Изменение видеосистемы.…………………………………………………………………

160

Калибровка электронного уровня……………………………………………………….

161

Сброс настроек электронного уровня……………………………………………..

161

Изменение цвета информации на экране……………………………………………

161

Использование эко-режима……………………………………………………………….

161

Настройка экономии энергии……………………………………………………………..

162

Яркость экрана………………………………………………………………………………….

162

Мировое время………………………………………………………………………………….

162

Дата и время……………………………………………………………………………………..

163

Время закрытия объектива…………………………………………………………………

163

Язык………………………………………………………………………………………………….

163

Отключение звуковых сигналов при работе камеры.……………………………

163

Регулировка громкости………………………………………………………………………

164

Настройка звуковых сигналов…………………………………………………………….

164

Начальная заставка.………………………………………………………………………….

164

Скрытие подсказок.…………………………………………………………………………..

164

Отображение в списке режимов съемки только значков………………………

164

Повышение чувствительности сенсорного экрана………………………………..

164

Автоматическая блокировка сенсорного экрана………………………………….

165

Метрические/неметрические единицы измерения……………………………….

165

Проверка логотипов сертификации…………………………………………………….

165

Задание записи в изображениях сведений об авторских правах…………..

165

Удаление всех сведений об авторских правах…………………………………

166

Настройка других параметров…………………………………………………………….

166

Восстановление настроек камеры по умолчанию.……………………………….

166

Принадлежности……………………………………………………………………….

167

Состав системы………………………………………………………………………………

167

Дополнительно приобретаемые принадлежности.…………………………….

168

Источники питания.……………………………………………………………………………

168

Вспышка……………………………………………………………………………………………

169

Прочие принадлежности…………………………………………………………………….

169

Принтеры…………………………………………………………………………………………..

169

Хранение фотографий и видеофильмов……………………………………………..

169

Использование дополнительно приобретаемых принадлежностей.……

170

Воспроизведение на экране телевизора……………………………………………..

170

Питание камеры от бытовой электросети…………………………………………….

171

Установка и зарядка аккумулятора…………………………………………………..

172

Зарядка аккумулятора с помощью компьютера………………………………

173

Использование программного обеспечения……………………………………..

173

Подключение к компьютеру с помощью кабеля…………………………………..

174

Проверка компьютерной среды……………………………………………………..

174

Установка программного обеспечения……………………………………………

174

Сохранение изображений в компьютере……………………………………………..

174

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

10

Печать изображений……………………………………………………………………….

175

Простая печать.…………………………………………………………………………………

175

Настройка параметров печати.…………………………………………………………..

176

Обрезка изображений перед печатью…………………………………………….

177

Выбор формата бумаги и компоновки перед печатью……………………..

177

Доступные варианты компоновки…………………………………………………..

178

Печать фотографий для документов………………………………………………

178

Печать эпизодов из видеофильма………………………………………………………

178

Параметры печати видеофильмов………………………………………………….

178

Добавление изображений в список печати (DPOF)………………………………

179

Настройка параметров печати.………………………………………………………

179

Настройка печати отдельных изображений……………………………………..

179

Настройка печати диапазона изображений.……………………………………

180

Настройка печати всех изображений………………………………………………

180

Удаление всех изображений из списка печати………………………………..

180

Печать изображений, добавленных в список печати (DPOF)…………….

180

Добавление изображений в фотокнигу.………………………………………………

181

Указание способа выбора………………………………………………………………

181

Добавление изображений по одному.…………………………………………….

181

Добавление всех изображений в фотокнигу……………………………………

181

Удаление всех изображений из фотокниги……………………………………..

181

Приложение………………………………………………………………………………

182

Устранение неполадок…………………………………………………………………….

182

Экранные сообщения……………………………………………………………………..

186

Информация на экране.………………………………………………………………….

188

Съемка (Отображение информации)…………………………………………………..

188

Уровень заряда аккумулятора………………………………………………………..

188

Воспроизведение (Подробная информация)……………………………………….

189

Сводка для панели управления видеофильмами…………………………….

189

Таблицы функций и меню………………………………………………………………..

190

Функции, доступные в различных режимах съемки.…………………………….

190

Меню быстрой установки……………………………………………………………………

192

Вкладка съемки…………………………………………………………………………………

195

Вкладка [

1].……………………………………………………………………………..

195

Вкладка [

2].……………………………………………………………………………..

196

Вкладка [

3].……………………………………………………………………………..

197

Вкладка [

4].……………………………………………………………………………..

198

Вкладка [

5].……………………………………………………………………………..

199

Вкладка [

6].……………………………………………………………………………..

200

Вкладка [

7].……………………………………………………………………………..

201

Вкладка [

8].……………………………………………………………………………..

201

Вкладка «Настройка».………………………………………………………………………..

202

Вкладка «Моё меню»………………………………………………………………………….

202

Вкладка воспроизведения………………………………………………………………….

202

Правила обращения………………………………………………………………………..

203

Технические характеристики……………………………………………………………

204

Камера……………………………………………………………………………………………..

204

Количество снимков/время съемки, время воспроизведения.………………

205

Диапазон съемки……………………………………………………………………………….

205

Количество снимков, которые можно записать на карту памяти……………

205

Время записи на карту памяти……………………………………………………………

206

Аккумулятор NB-13L………………………………………………………………………….

206

Зарядное устройство CB-2LH/CB-2LHE……………………………………………….

206

Компактный сетевой адаптер CA-DC30/CA-DC30E……………………………….

206

Алфавитный указатель.…………………………………………………………………..

207

Меры предосторожности в отношении Wi-Fi (беспроводной сети)………

209

Меры предосторожности в отношении радиопомех.…………………………….

209

Меры предосторожности в отношении безопасности……………………………

209

Торговые марки и лицензирование…………………………………………………

210

Ограничение ответственности………………………………………………………..

210

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

11

Обычные операции с камерой

Съемка

●● Использование настроек, выбираемых камерой (автоматический режим, гибридный автоматический режим)

=33, =35

●● Применение нескольких эффектов к каждому снимку с использованием параметров, определяемых камерой (режим творческого снимка)

=55 Качественная съемка людей

Портреты (=57)

В соответствии с конкретными сюжетами

Ночные сюжеты

Звездное небо

Фейерверк

(=57)

(=63)

(=57)

Применение специальных эффектов

Яркие цвета

Эффект плаката

«Старые» фотографии

(=58)

(=58)

(=59)

Эффект «Рыбий глаз»

Эффект миниатюры

Эффект игрушечной камеры

(=59)

(=60)

(=61)

Размытие фона

Мягкий фокус

Монохромный

(=61)

(=62)

(=62)

●●

Фокусировка на лица

=33, =57, =84

●● Без использования вспышки (вспышка выключена)

=33

●●

Включение себя в кадр (Автоспуск)

=40

●●

Сочетание видеоклипов и фотографий (Подборка видео)

=35

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

12

Просмотр

●● Просмотр изображений (режим воспроизведения) =103

●● Автоматическое воспроизведение (Слайд-шоу) =113

●● На экране телевизора =170

●● На экране компьютера =174

●● Быстрый обзор изображений =107

●● Удаление изображений =115

●● Автоматическое создание альбомов =127

Запись/просмотр видеофильмов

●● Запись видеофильмов =33, =69, =95

●● Просмотр видеофильмов (режим воспроизведения) =103

Печать

●● Печать изображений =175

Сохранение

●● Сохранение изображений в компьютере =174

Использование функций Wi-Fi

●● Отправка изображений в смартфон =132

●● Публикация изображений в Интернете =144

●● Отправка изображений в компьютер =152

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

13

Меры предосторожности

●● Перед использованием изделия обязательно прочтите приведенные ниже правила техники безопасности. Строго следите за соблюдением правил надлежащего обращения с камерой.

●● Приведенные здесь меры предосторожности призваны предотвратить получение травм пользователем или другими лицами, а также повреждение имущества.

●● Также обязательно изучите руководства, входящие в комплект поставки всех используемых Вами дополнительных принадлежностей.

Предостережение

Указывает на возможность серьезной

травмы, вплоть до смертельного исхода.

●● Запрещается применять вспышку в непосредственной близости от глаз людей. Воздействие света повышенной интенсивности, испускаемого вспышкой, может привести к ухудшению зрения. В частности, при съемке детей минимально допустимое расстояние до ребенка составляет 1 м.

●● Оборудование следует хранить в местах, недоступных для детей и подростков. Попадание ремня на шею ребенка может привести к удушению.

Если в изделии используется кабель питания, при случайном попадании на шею ребенка он может стать причиной удушения.

●● Используйте только рекомендованные источники питания.

●● Запрещается разбирать, модифицировать или нагревать изделие.

●● Запрещается снимать с аккумулятора клейкую оболочку (если она есть). ●● Не допускайте падения изделия или сильных ударов по нему.

●● Не дотрагивайтесь до внутренних деталей изделия, если оно повреждено, например в результате падения.

●● Если из изделия идет дым, ощущается посторонний запах или изделие работает неправильно, немедленно прекратите его использование.

●● Запрещается чистить изделие органическими растворителями, такими как спирт, бензин или разбавитель для краски.

●● Не допускайте контакта с жидкостями , а также попадания жидкости или посторонних предметов внутрь изделия.

Возможно поражение электрическим током или возгорание.

Если изделие намокло или внутрь него попала жидкость либо посторонние предметы, немедленно извлеките аккумулятор/элементы питания или отсоедините вилку питания.

●● Если ваша модель камеры оснащена видоискателем или сменным объективом, не смотрите через видоискатель или объектив на яркие источники света (например, на солнце в ясный день или на яркий искусственный источник света).

Это может привести к повреждению глаз.

●● Если ваша модель камеры оснащена сменным объективом, не оставляйте объектив (или камеру с установленным объективом) на солнце без установленной крышки объектива.

Это может привести к возгоранию.

●● Не дотрагивайтесь до изделия во время грозы, если оно подключено к сетевой розетке.

Возможно поражение электрическим током или возгорание. Немедленно прекратите пользоваться изделием и отойдите от него.

●● Пользуйтесь только рекомендованными аккумуляторами/элементами питания.

●● Не оставляйте аккумуляторы/элементы питания рядом с открытым огнем и не бросайте их в огонь.

В результате возможен взрыв или утечка электролита из аккумулятора или элементов питания и, как следствие, поражение электрическим током, пожар или травмирование. Если электролит, вытекший из аккумуляторов или элементов питания, попал в глаза, рот, на кожу или на одежду, немедленно смойте электролит водой.

●● Если с изделием используется зарядное устройство, соблюдайте следующие меры предосторожности.

Регулярно отсоединяйте вилку кабеля питания и сухой тканью удаляйте пыль и загрязнения, скапливающиеся на вилке, внутренних поверхностях электри­ ческой розетки и на окружающих областях.

Запрещается вставлять или извлекать вилку влажными руками.

При использовании оборудования следите, чтобы его мощность не превышала номинальной нагрузочной способности электрической розетки или соедини­ тельных проводов. Не используйте оборудование, если вилка кабеля питания повреждена или неполностью вставлена в розетку.

Не допускайте соприкосновения металлических предметов (например, булавок или ключей) с контактами или вилкой, а также накопления на них пыли.

Если используемое изделие оснащается кабелем питания, не допускайте порезов или повреждений кабеля, не вносите изменений в его конструкцию и не ставьте на него тяжелые предметы.

Возможно поражение электрическим током или возгорание.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

14

●● Выключайте камеру в местах, в которых ее использование запрещено. Излучаемые камерой электромагнитные волны могут мешать работе электронных приборов или других устройств. Соблюдайте необходимую осторожность при исполь­ зовании изделия в местах, в которых ограничено использование электронных устройств, например в самолетах или в медицинских учреждениях.

●● Не допускайте длительного контакта камеры с кожей.

Даже если камера не кажется горячей, она может вызывать низкотемпературные ожоги, которые проявляются в виде покраснения кожи или волдырей. В местах с высокой температурой, а также если у вас замедленное кровообращение или чувствительная кожа, пользуйтесь штативом.

Предупреждение Указывает на возможность травмы.

●● Перенося изделие за ремень, соблюдайте осторожность, чтобы не допускать ударов по изделию, не подвергать его чрезмерным механическим нагрузкам и тряске, а также не допускать зацепления ремня за другие предметы.

●● Будьте осторожны, чтобы не допускать ударов или сильного нажатия на объектив. Это может привести к травме или к поломке камеры.

●● Будьте осторожны, чтобы не допускать сильных ударов по экрану. Если экран треснет, осколки могут стать причиной травмы.

●● Следите, чтобы в процессе съемки не закрывать вспышку пальцами или одеждой. Это может привести к ожогам или повреждению вспышки.

●● Не используйте, не оставляйте и не храните изделие в следующих местах: под прямыми солнечными лучами;

при температуре выше 40 °C;

во влажных или пыльных местах.

В противном случае возможна протечка, перегрев или взрыв аккумулятора или элемен­ тов питания, и, в результате, поражение электрическим током, возникновение пожара или причинение ожогов и других травм.

Перегрев и повреждения могут приводить к поражению электрическим током, возго­ ранию, ожогам или другим травмам.

●● При длительном просмотре эффекты перехода между кадрами слайд-шоу могут вызывать дискомфорт.

●● При использовании дополнительно приобретаемых конвертеров, фильтров для объективов или переходников фильтров (если применимо), обязательно следите за надежностью их крепления.

В случае падения принадлежности из-за плохого крепления она может разбиться, и можно порезаться об осколки стекла.

●● При использовании изделий, на которых вспышка поднимается и опускается автоматически, соблюдайте осторожность, чтобы опускающаяся вспышка не прищемила пальцы.

Это может привести к травме.

Предупреждение Указывает на возможность повреждения имущества.

●● Запрещается направлять камеру на яркие источники света, например на солнце

вясный день или мощный источник искусственного освещения.

Впротивном случае возможно повреждение датчика изображения или других внут­ ренних компонентов.

●● При использовании камеры на песчаном пляже или в ветреных местах не допускайте попадания внутрь камеры пыли или песка.

●● На изделиях, в которых вспышка поднимается и убирается автоматически, запре­ щается принудительно закрывать или открывать вспышку руками.

Это может привести к неполадкам в работе изделия.

●● Убирайте со вспышки всю пыль, грязь и другие посторонние вещества с помощью ватной палочки или ткани.

Под воздействием тепла от вспышки посторонние материалы могут начать дымиться или изделие может выйти из строя.

●● Если изделие не используется, извлеките из него аккумулятор или элементы питания и уберите их на хранение.

В случае протечки аккумулятора или элементов питания изделие может быть повреждено.

●● Перед тем как выбросить аккумулятор или элементы питания, закройте их клеммы лентой или другим изоляционным материалом.

Контакт с другими металлическими предметами может привести к возгоранию или взрыву.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

15

●● Когда зарядное устройство, прилагаемое к изделию, не используется, отсоединяйте его от сети. Во время использования запрещается закрывать изделие тканью или другими предметами.

Если устройство длительное время остается подключенным к электрической розетке, оно может перегреться и деформироваться, что, в свою очередь, может привести к возгоранию.

●● Не оставляйте специальные аккумуляторы рядом с домашними животными. Если животное укусит аккумулятор, возможна протечка, перегрев или взрыв аккуму­ лятора и, как следствие, пожар или повреждение изделия.

●● Если в изделии используется несколько элементов питания, не следует одновременно устанавливать элементы с разным уровнем заряда или старые и новые элементы. Не устанавливайте аккумуляторы/элементы питания в обратной полярности (клеммы + и –).

Это может привести к неполадкам в работе изделия.

●● Убирая камеру в сумку, следите, чтобы твердые предметы не касались экрана камеры. Кроме того, закройте экран (чтобы он был обращен к корпусу), если это допускается конструкцией изделия.

●● Не закрепляйте на изделии никакие твердые предметы.

В противном случае возможно возникновение неполадок или повреждение экрана.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

16

Основные операции

Основные операции

Основные сведения и инструкции, от первоначальной подготовки до съемки и воспроизведения

Использование сенсорного экрана

Сенсорный экран камеры обеспечивает интуитивно понятное управление путем нажатия на экран или постукивания по нему.

Нажатие

Кратковременно нажмите на экран пальцем.

zzЭтот жест используется для съемки, настройки функций камеры и т. п.

Перетаскивание

Прикоснитесь к экрану и проведите по нему пальцем.

zzЭтот жест используется в режиме воспроизве­ дения для перехода к следующему изображению, изменению отображаемой области увеличенного изображения и других операций.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

17

Начальная подготовка

Выполните указанную ниже подготовку к съемке.

Закрепление ремня

(1)

(2)

zzПроденьте конец ремня через крепление для ремня (1), затем протяните другой конец ремня через петлю на продетом конце (2).

zzРемень можно также закрепить на левой стороне камеры.

Как правильно держать камеру

zzНаденьте ремень на запястье.

zzВо время съемки прижмите локти к туловищу и надежно держите камеру, чтобы исключить ее перемещение. Если Вы подняли вспышку, не кладите на нее пальцы.

Зарядка аккумулятора

Перед использованием зарядите аккумулятор с помощью прилагаемого зарядного устройства. Обязательно сначала зарядите аккумулятор, так как камера продается с незаряженным аккумулятором.

(1)

(2)

(2)

(1)

CB-2LH

CB-2LHE

1 Установите аккумулятор.

zzСовместив меткина аккумуляторе и зарядном устройстве, установите аккумулятор, нажав на него внутрь (1) и опустив (2).

2 Зарядите аккумулятор.

zzCB-2LH: откройте контакты вилки (1) и подклю­ чите зарядное устройство к электрической розетке (2).

zzCB-2LHE: подключите кабель питания к заряд­ ному устройству, затем подключите другой конец кабеля к электрической розетке.

zzИндикатор зарядки загорается оранжевым цветом, и начинается зарядка.

zzПосле завершения зарядки цвет индикатора изменяется на зеленый.

3 Извлеките аккумулятор.

zzОтсоединив зарядное устройство от сети, извлеките аккумулятор, нажав на него внутрь (1) и вверх (2).

●● Для защиты аккумулятора и поддержания его оптимального состояния длительность непрерывной зарядки не должна превышать 24 ч.

●● В случае зарядных устройств, в которых используется кабель питания, запре­ щается подключать зарядное устройство или кабель питания к посторонним предметам. Несоблюдение этого требования может привести к неполадкам или повреждению изделия.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

18

●● Подробные сведения о времени зарядки, а также о количестве кадров

2 Установите аккумулятор.

zzДержа аккумулятор клеммами в показанном

и времени съемки с полностью заряженным аккумулятором см. в разделе

положении (1), сдвиньте фиксатор аккумуля­

«Количество снимков/время съемки, время воспроизведения» (= 205).

(1)

тора в направлении (2) и вставьте аккумулятор

●● Заряженные аккумуляторы постепенно разряжаются, даже если они не

в направлении­ (3), пока фиксатор не закроется

используются. Заряжайте аккумулятор в день использования (или непос­

(2)

со щелчком.

редственно накануне).

(3)

zzАккумулятор, вставленный в неправильной ориен­

●● Для визуальной индикации состояния аккумулятора устанавливайте крышку

тации, не фиксируется в правильном положении.

таким образом, чтобы у заряженного аккумулятора символ

был виден,

При установке аккумулятора обязательно прове­

а у разряженного – не виден.

ряйте правильность его ориентации и надежность

●● Зарядное устройство можно использовать в местах с напряжением сети

фиксации.

переменного тока 100 – 240 В (50/60 Гц). Для электрических розеток другой

3 Проверьте переключатель защиты от записи

формы используйте имеющиеся в продаже переходники для вилки. Запре­

(1)

щается пользоваться электрическими трансформаторами, предназначен­

на карте и установите карту памяти.

ными для путешествий, так как они могут повредить аккумулятор.

zzЗапись на карты памяти с переключателем

(2)

защиты от записи невозможна, если переклю­

Установка аккумулятора и вашей карты памяти

чатель находится в положении блокировки.

Переместите переключатель в направлении (1).

Установите прилагаемый аккумулятор и карту памяти (продается отдельно).

zzУстановите карту памяти этикеткой (2) в пока­

занной­ ориентации до фиксации со щелчком.

Обратите внимание, что перед использованием новой карты памяти или карты памяти,

zzПри установке карты памяти проверьте правиль­

отформатированной в другом устройстве, необходимо отформатировать эту карту

ность ее ориентации. Установка карт памяти

памяти в данной камере (=160).

1 Откройте крышку.

в неправильной ориентации может привести

к повреждению камеры.

4 Закройте крышку.

(1)

zzСдвиньте переключатель (1) и откройте

(2)

крышку (2).

zzОпустите крышку (1) и, прижимая крышку вниз,

сдвиньте переключатель до фиксации в закрытом

положении (2).

(2)

(1)

●● Сведения о количестве кадров, которые можно записать на карту памяти, или о времени видеозаписи на карту памяти см. в разделе «Количество снимков, которые можно записать на карту памяти» (= 205).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

19

Извлечение аккумулятора и карты памяти

Извлеките аккумулятор.

zzОткройте крышку и нажмите фиксатор акку­ мулятора в направлении стрелки.

zzАккумулятор выдвинется вверх.

Извлеките карту памяти.

zzНажмите на карту памяти до щелчка, затем медленно отпустите ее.

zzКарта памяти выдвинется вверх.

Установка даты и времени

Если при включении камеры отображается экран [Дата/Время], установите правильные­ дату и время, как указано ниже. Заданная таким образом информация записывается­

всвойства снимаемых изображений и используется для управления изображениями

всоответствии с датой их съемки, а также для печати изображений с указанием даты.

1 Включите камеру. zzНажмите кнопку ON/OFF.

zzОтображается экран [Дата/Время].

2 Установите дату и время.

zzНажмите параметр, который требуется задать, затем установите дату и время, нажимая [][].

zzПосле завершения нажмите кнопку [].

3 Укажите свой местный (домашний) часовой пояс.

zzВыберите свой местный (домашний) часовой пояс, нажимая [][].

4 Завершите процесс настройки.

zzПосле завершения нажмите кнопку []. После подтверждающего сообщения экран настройки больше не отображается.

zzЧтобы выключить камеру, нажмите кнопку ON/OFF.

●● Если дата, время и домашний часовой пояс не установлены, экран [Дата/Время] будет отображаться при каждом включении камеры. Укажите правильную информацию.

●● Для установки летнего времени (перевода часов на 1 час вперед) нажмите [] и выберите [] на шаге 2.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

20

Изменение даты и времени

Дата и время настраиваются следующим образом.

1 Откройте экран настройки. zzНажмите кнопку [].

2 Выберите пункт [Дата/Время]. zzНажмите [], затем нажмите [2].

zzНажмите пункт [Дата/Время], затем нажмите кнопку [].

3 Измените дату и время.

zzВыполните настройку в соответствии с инструк­ циями шага 2 раздела «Установка даты и времени» (=20).

zzДля закрытия экрана меню нажмите кнопку [].

●● После извлечения аккумулятора настройки даты и времени сохраняются в течение приблизительно 3 недель за счет встроенного в камеру аккуму­ лятора календаря (аккумулятор резервного питания).

●● Аккумулятор календаря заряжается приблизительно за 4 ч после установки заряженного аккумулятора или подключения камеры к адаптеру переменного тока (продается отдельно, =168), даже если камера оставлена выключенной.

●● Если аккумулятор календаря разряжен, при включении камеры отображается экран [Дата/Время]. Установите правильную дату и время, как описано в разделе «Установка даты и времени» (= 20).

Язык

Установите требуемый язык отображаемого интерфейса.

1 Перейдите в режим воспроизведения. zzНажмите кнопку [].

2 Откройте экран настройки.

zzНажмите кнопку [] и, не отпуская ее, сразу же нажмите кнопку [].

3 Установите язык.

zzВыберите язык, нажав его на экране, затем нажмите кнопку [].

zzПосле задания языка экран настройки больше не отображается.

●● Если на шаге 2 промежуток между нажатием кнопки [] и кнопки [] был слишком большим, отображается текущее время. В таком случае нажмите кнопку [], чтобы убрать индикацию времени, и повторите шаг 2.

●● Язык для отображения текста на экране можно также изменить, нажав кнопку [] и выбрав пункт [Язык ] на вкладке [3].

●● Язык для отображения текста на экране можно также изменить, нажав язык на экране из шага 3, затем нажав его еще раз.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

21

Опробование камеры

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

Следуйте этим инструкциям для включения камеры, съемки фотографий или виде­ фильмов и последующего их просмотра.

Съемка (Smart Auto)

Для полностью автоматического выбора оптимальных настроек для определенных сюжетов просто позвольте камере определять объект и условия съемки.

1 Включите камеру.

zzНажмите кнопку ON/OFF. zzОтображается начальный экран.

2 Перейдите в режим [].

zzПоверните диск установки режима в положение [].

zzНаведите камеру на объект. При определении сюжета камера издает слабые щелкающие звуки.

zzВ левом верхнем углу экрана отображаются значки, обозначающие сюжет и режим стаби­ лизации изображения.

zzРамки, отображаемые вокруг любых опреде­ ленных объектов, указывают, что эти объекты находятся в фокусе.

3 Выберите композицию кадра.

zzДля увеличения объекта переместите рычаг зумирования в направлении символа [] (положение телефото), а для уменьшения объекта переместите этот рычаг в направлении символа [] (широкоугольное положение).

4 Произведите съемку. Съемка фотографий

1)Сфокусируйтесь.

zzСлегка (наполовину) нажмите кнопку спуска затвора. После завершения фокусировки камера подает два звуковых сигнала и отображаются рамки, указывающие области изображения, находящиеся в фокусе.

zzЕсли отображается сообщение [Поднимите вспышку], поднимите вспышку с помощью переключателя []. При съемке сработает вспышка. Если требуется отключить вспышку, пальцем опустите ее вниз в камеру.

2)Произведите съемку.

zzПолностью нажмите кнопку спуска затвора.

zzВо время съемки слышен звук срабатывания затвора; если вспышка была поднята, то при недостаточной освещенности она автомати­ чески срабатывает.

zzДержите камеру неподвижно, пока не закон­ чится звук срабатывания затвора.

zzПосле отображения снятого кадра камера возвращается на экран съемки.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

22

Съемка видеофильмов

1)

Запустите съемку.

zzНажмите кнопку видеосъемки. В начале съемки

камера подает один звуковой сигнал и отобра­

(1)

жается индикатор [ ЗАП] с указанием прошед­

шего времени съемки (1).

zzВверху и внизу экрана отображаются черные

полосы, и объект немного увеличивается. Черные

полосы обозначают области изображения, которые

не записываются.

zzРамки, отображаемые вокруг любых опреде­

ленных лиц, указывают, что эти лица находятся

в фокусе.

zzПосле начала съемки отпустите кнопку

видеосъемки.

2) Завершите съемку.

zzДля остановки съемки снова нажмите кнопку видеосъемки. При остановке съемки камера подает два звуковых сигнала.

Просмотр

После съемки фотографий или видеофильмов их можно просмотреть на экране в соответствии с приведенными ниже инструкциями.

1 Перейдите в режим воспроизведения.

zzНажмите кнопку []. zzОтображается последний снимок.

2 Выберите изображения.

zzДля просмотра следующего снимка проведите пальцем по экрану справа налево, для просмотре предыдущего снимка проведите пальцем слева направо.

zzДля перехода на этот экран (режим прокрутки экрана) быстро несколько раз проведите пальцем по экрану влево или вправо. В этом режиме для перехода между снимками проводите пальцем по экрану.

zzПри нажатии кнопки [] восстанавливается режим отображения одного изображения.

zzВидеофильмы обозначаются значком []. Для воспроизведения видеофильмов перехо­ дите к шагу 3.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

23

3 Запустите воспроизведение видеофильмов.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите значок [], затем нажмите кнопку [].

zzНачинается воспроизведение, и после заверше­ ния видеофильма отображается значок [].

zzДля регулировки громкости во время воспроиз­­ ведения быстро проведите пальцем по экрану вверх или вниз.

●● Для переключения из режима воспроизведения в режим съемки наполовину нажмите кнопку спуска затвора.

●● Воспроизведение видеофильма можно также запустить, нажав [].

Стирание изображений

Ненужные изображения можно выбирать и удалять по одному. Будьте осторожны при удалении изображений, так как их невозможно восстановить.

1 Выберите изображение для удаления.

zzПроводя пальцем влево или вправо по экрану, выберите изображение.

2 Удалите изображение.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите значок [], затем нажмите кнопку [].

zzПосле появления запроса [Стереть?] нажмите [Стереть].

zzТекущее изображение удаляется. zzДля отмены удаления нажмите [Отмена].

●● Изображения можно также удалять с помощью жестов сенсорного экрана (=119).

●● Можно выбрать несколько изображений и удалить их за одну операцию (=116).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

24

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Прочие основные операции и дополнительные функции камеры, включая варианты съемки и воспроизведения

Включение и выключение

Режим съемки

zzНажмите кнопку ON/OFF, чтобы включить камеру и подготовить ее к съемке.

zzЧтобы выключить камеру, еще раз нажмите кнопку ON/OFF.

Режим воспроизведения

zzДля включения камеры и просмотра снимков нажмите кнопку [].

zzЧтобы выключить камеру, еще раз нажмите кнопку [].

●● Для переключения в режим воспроизведения из режима съемки нажмите кнопку [].

●● Для переключения из режима воспроизведения в режим съемки наполовину нажмите кнопку спуска затвора (=26).

●● Объектив закрывается приблизительно через 1 мин после переключения камеры в режим воспроизведения. Камеру можно выключить при закрытом объективе, нажав кнопку [].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

25

Функции экономии энергии (Автовыключение)

Для экономии энергии аккумуляторов/элементов питания после определенного периода бездействия камера автоматически выключает экран (Дисплей Выкл.), а затем выключается.

Экономия энергии в режиме съемки

Экран автоматически выключается приблизительно через 1 мин простоя. Приблизи­ тельно через 2 мин закрывается объектив, и камера выключается. Чтобы включить экран и подготовиться к съемке, когда экран выключен, но объектив еще не закрыт, нажмите наполовину кнопку спуска затвора (=26).

Экономия энергии в режиме воспроизведения

Камера автоматически выключается приблизительно через 5 мин простоя.

●● Если требуется, можно отключить функцию автовыключения и настроить время выключения дисплея (=162).

●● Функция экономии энергии не работает, когда камера подключена к другим устройствам по соединению Wi-Fi (=131) или подключена к компьютеру (=174).

Кнопка спуска затвора

Для обеспечения резкости снимков обязательно сначала нажмите кнопку спуска затвора наполовину, а затем, когда объект окажется в фокусе, полностью нажмите кнопку спуска затвора для съемки.

В данном руководстве операции с кнопкой спуска затвора описываются как нажатие кнопки наполовину и полное нажатие кнопки.

1 Нажмите наполовину. (Слегка нажмите для фокусировки.)

zzНажмите наполовину кнопку спуска затвора. Камера подает два звуковых сигнала, и вокруг областей изображения, находящихся в фокусе, отображаются рамки.

2 Полностью нажмите. (Из наполовину нажатого положения полностью нажмите

кнопку, чтобы произвести съемку.)

zzКамера производит съемку, и воспроизводится

звук срабатывания затвора.

zzДержите камеру неподвижно, пока не закончится звук срабатывания затвора.

●● Если при съемке кнопка спуска затвора не была предварительно нажата наполовину, снимки могут получаться нерезкими.

●● Длительность воспроизведения звука срабатывания затвора зависит от времени, необходимого для съемки. Для съемки определенных сюжетов может потребоваться больше времени, и в случае перемещения камеры (или снимаемого объекта) до завершения звука срабатывания затвора изображения могут быть смазаны.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

26

Режимы съемки

Диск установки режима служит для доступа к каждому из режимов съемки.

(1)Автоматический/гибридный автомати­ ческий­ режим Полностью автоматическая съемка

с настройками, определенными камерой (=22, =33, =35).

(2)Режим творческого снимка

Автоматическое применение нескольких эффектов к каждому снимку (=55).

(3)Режим специального сюжета Съемка с настройками, предназначен­

ными для каждого конкретного сюжета,

или добавление различных эффектов (=57).

(4)Режим видеосъемки

Для съемки видеофильмов (=69, =95).

Видеофильмы можно также снимать, когда диск установки режима не нахо­ дится в положении режима видеосъемки, просто нажимая кнопку видеосъемки.

(5)Режимы P, Tv, Av, M и C

Различные виды съемки с использо­ ванием требуемых настроек (=73, =92).

Варианты индикации при съемке

Нажимая кнопку [

], можно отображать или скрывать линии сетки и электронный­

уровень.

Для более подробной настройки экранной индикации откройте вкладку [1] ► [Отображение информации о съемке] (=98).

●● При съемке в условиях недостаточной освещенности яркость экрана авто­ матически увеличивается функцией ночного отображения, упрощая проверку композиции кадра. Однако яркость изображения на экране может не соот­ ветствовать яркости снимков. Обратите внимание, что любые искажения изображения на экране или прерывистое движение объекта на экране не влияют на записываемое изображение.

●● Варианты индикации при воспроизведении см. в разделе «Переключение режимов отображения» (= 105).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

27

Использование меню быстрой установки

Часто используемые функции можно настроить в меню (Быстрая установка). Обратите внимание, что состав меню и значения его пунктов зависят от режима съемки (=192).

1 Откройте меню . zzНажмите кнопку [].

2 Выберите пункт меню.

zzНажмите пункт меню (1), чтобы выбрать его.

zzДоступные значения (2) отображаются в нижней части экрана.

(1) (2)

3 Выберите вариант.

zzПеретащите вариант влево или вправо, чтобы выбрать его.

zzПункты, помеченные значком [], можно настраивать, нажимая кнопку [].

zzПункты, помеченные значком [], можно настраивать, нажимая кнопку [].

4 Подтвердите выбор и выйдите из меню. zzНажмите кнопку [].

zzСнова отображается экран, который отображался­ до нажатия кнопки [] на шаге 1, показывающий настроенное значение.

●● Чтобы отменить случайные изменения настроек, можно восстановить настройки камеры по умолчанию (=166).

●● Для выхода можно также нажать [] в меню.

Настройка параметров с помощью сенсорного экрана

zzНажмите [] в правом верхнем углу экрана, чтобы открыть меню быстрой установки.

zzДля завершения настройки нажмите пункт меню, затем его значение.

zzДля возврата на предыдущий экран нажмите пункт меню [] или снова нажмите выбранный вариант.

zzДля доступа к пунктам, помеченным значком [], нажмите [].

zzДля доступа к пунктам, помеченным значком [], нажмите [].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

28

Использование экрана меню

Различные функции камеры можно настраивать с помощью экрана меню, как показано ниже.

1 Откройте экран настройки. zzНажмите кнопку [].

2 Выберите вкладку.

zzДля выбора вкладки нажмите ее.

zzВкладки соответствуют функциям (1), таким как съемка ([]), воспроизведение ([]) или настройка ([]), либо страницам в каждой функции (2). Вкладки в этом руководстве обозначаются сочетанием функции и страницы, например [1].

zzВкладки страниц можно также выбирать, пере­ мещая рычаг зумирования или проводя пальцем по экрану влево или вправо.

3 Выберите пункт меню.

zzНажмите пункт, чтобы выбрать его, затем нажмите кнопку [].

zzПункты меню можно также выбирать, повора­ чивая кольцо [].

zzДля пунктов меню, значения которых не отобра­ жаются, сначала нажмите кнопку [], чтобы переключить экраны, затем нажмите пункт, чтобы выбрать его.

zzДля возврата на экран меню нажмите кнопку [].

4 Выберите вариант.

zzНажмите вариант, чтобы выбрать его.

5 Подтвердите выбор и выйдите из меню.

zzНажмите кнопку [], чтобы подтвердить сделанный выбор и вернуться на экран выбора пункта меню.

zzНажмите кнопку [] для возврата на экран, который отображался до нажатия кнопки [] на шаге 1.

●● Чтобы отменить случайные изменения настроек, можно восстановить настройки камеры по умолчанию (=166).

●● Доступные пункты меню зависят от выбранного режима съемки или воспро­ изведения (=195 – =202).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

29

Использование сенсорного экрана

●● Для выбора вкладок нажмите кнопку [], чтобы открыть экран меню, затем нажмите требуемые вкладку функции и вкладку страницы.

●● Проведите пальцем вверх или вниз по пунктам меню для прокрутки или нажмите пункт меню, чтобы выбрать его.

●● Нажмите значение, чтобы завершить настройку и вернуться на экран выбора пункта меню.

●● Для пунктов меню, отображаемых со шкалой, показывающей значение, нажмите требуемое место на шкале.

●● Для настройки пунктов меню, варианты для которых не отображаются, сначала нажмите пункт, чтобы открыть экран настройки. На экране настройки выберите пункт, перетаскивая или нажимая на экран, затем нажмите для выбора варианта. Для возврата на предыдущий экран нажмите [].

●● Можно также выбирать элементы ввода (такие как флажки или текстовые поля), нажимая их, и вводить текст, нажимая кнопки на экранной клавиатуре.

●● Когда отображается значок [], при желании вместо кнопки [] можно нажимать значок [].

●● Когда отображается значок [], при желании вместо кнопки [] можно нажимать значок [].

●● Когда отображается значок [], при желании вместо кнопки [] можно нажимать значок [].

●● Чтобы закрыть меню, еще раз нажмите кнопку [].

Экранная клавиатура

Экранная клавиатура позволяет вводить информацию для идентификации лиц (=43), подключений Wi-Fi (=131) и т. д. Обратите внимание, что длина и тип вводимой информации зависят от используемой функции.

(1)

Ввод символов

zzДля ввода символов нажимайте их.

zzОбъем вводимой информации (1) зависит

от используемой функции.

Перемещение курсора

zzНажмите [

][

].

Ввод символов новой строки

zzНажмите [

].

Переключение режимов ввода

zzДля переключения на цифры или символы

нажмите [

].

zzДля ввода заглавных букв нажмите [ ].

zzДоступные режимы ввода зависят от исполь­

зуемой функции.

Удаление символов

zzДля удаления предыдущего символа

нажмите [

].

zzЕсли нажать кнопку [] и удерживать

ее нажатой, символы будут удаляться груп­ пами по пять.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

30

Подтверждение ввода и возврат к предыдущему экрану

zzНажмите кнопку [].

●● Для некоторых функций [] не отображается и не может использоваться.

Индикатор

Индикатор на задней панели камеры (=4) загорается или мигает в зависимости от состояния камеры.

Цвет

Состояние

Состояние камеры

индикатора

Начальная загрузка, запись/чтение/передача

изображений, съемка с длительной выдержкой

Зеленый

Мигает

(=92, =93), выполнено подключение

к компьютеру­ (=174), подключение/передача

данных по Wi-Fi или дисплей выключен (=26,

=161, =162)

Оранжевый

Горит

Зарядка по USB

●● Когда этот индикатор мигает зеленым цветом, не выключайте камеру, не открывайте крышку гнезда карты памяти/отсека элементов питания,

не встряхивайте камеру и не стучите по ней; несоблюдение этих требований может привести к повреждению изображений, камеры или карты памяти.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

31

Часы

Можно посмотреть текущее время.

zzНажмите кнопку [] и удерживайте ее нажатой. zzОтображается текущее время.

zzЕсли при использовании функции часов камера ориентирована вертикально, индикация изменя­­ ется на вертикальную.

zzДля изменения цвета поворачивайте кольцо [].

zzДля отмены отображения часов снова нажмите кнопку [].

●● Если камера выключена, для отображения часов нажмите кнопку [] и, удерживая ее нажатой, нажмите кнопку ON/OFF.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

32

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Удобный режим для простой съемки с увеличенными возможностями управления

Съемка с настройками, определенными камерой

Для полностью автоматического выбора оптимальных настроек для определенных сюжетов просто позвольте камере определять объект и условия съемки.

Съемка (Smart Auto)

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

1 Включите камеру. zzНажмите кнопку ON/OFF. zzОтображается начальный экран.

2 Перейдите в режим [].

zzПоверните диск установки режима в положение [].

zzНаведите камеру на объект. При определении сюжета камера издает слабые щелкающие звуки.

zzВ левом верхнем углу экрана отображаются значки, обозначающие сюжет и режим стаби­ лизации изображения (=37, =38).

zzРамки, отображаемые вокруг любых опреде­ ленных объектов, указывают, что эти объекты находятся в фокусе.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

33

3 Выберите композицию кадра.

2) Произведите съемку.

zzДля увеличения объекта переместите рычаг зуми­

zzПолностью нажмите кнопку спуска затвора.

рования в направлении символа [ ] (положение

zzВо время съемки слышен звук срабатывания

телефото), а для уменьшения объекта перемес­

затвора; если вспышка была поднята, то при

тите этот рычаг в направлении символа [ ]

недостаточной освещенности она автомати­

(широкоугольное положение). (Отображается

чески срабатывает.

шкала зумирования (1), показывающая поло­

zzДержите камеру неподвижно, пока не закон­

жение зумирования и область, находящуюся

чится звук срабатывания затвора.

в фокусе (2).)

zzПосле отображения снятого кадра камера

возвращается на экран съемки.

4 Произведите съемку.

Съемка видеофильмов

1) Запустите съемку.

Съемка фотографий

zzНажмите кнопку видеосъемки. В начале съемки

1) Сфокусируйтесь.

камера подает один звуковой сигнал и отобра­

жается индикатор [ ЗАП] с указанием прошед­

zzНажмите наполовину кнопку спуска затвора.

(1)

шего времени съемки (1).

После завершения фокусировки камера подает

zzВверху и внизу экрана отображаются черные

два звуковых сигнала и отображаются рамки,

полосы, и объект немного увеличивается. Черные

указывающие области изображения, находящиеся­

полосы обозначают области изображения, которые

в фокусе.

не записываются.

zzЕсли в фокусе находятся несколько областей,

zzРамки, отображаемые вокруг любых опреде­

отображаются несколько рамок.

ленных лиц, указывают, что эти лица находятся

в фокусе.

zzПосле начала съемки отпустите кнопку видеосъемки.

2) Требуемым образом измените размер

zzЕсли отображается сообщение [Поднимите

объекта и композицию кадра.

zzЧтобы изменить размер объекта, повторите

вспышку], поднимите вспышку с помощью

операции из шага 3.

переключателя [ ]. При съемке сработает

Однако помните, что звуки работы камеры

вспышка. Если требуется отключить вспышку,

записываются. Обратите внимание, что на

пальцем опустите ее вниз в камеру.

видеофильмах, которые сняты с коэффици­

ентом зумирования, отображаемым синим

цветом, будет заметно зерно.

zzПри изменении композиции кадров фокусировка,

яркость и цвета автоматически настраиваются.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

34

3)Завершите съемку.

zzДля остановки съемки снова нажмите кнопку видеосъемки. При остановке съемки камера подает два звуковых сигнала.

zzПри полном заполнении карты памяти съемка автоматически останавливается.

●● Срабатывание вспышки во время съемки означает, что камера автоматически пытается обеспечить оптимальные цвета главного объекта и заднего плана (многозонный баланс белого).

Съемка в гибридном автоматическом режиме

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

Можно снять короткий видеофильм о проведенном дне, просто снимая фотографии. Перед каждым кадром камера записывает клипы длительностью 2 – 4 с, которые впоследствии объединяются в видеоподборку.

1 Перейдите в режим [].

zzВ соответствии с шагом 2 раздела «Съемка (Smart Auto)» (=33) выберите значок [].

2 Выберите композицию кадра.

zzДля компоновки кадра и фокусировки выполните шаги 3 – 4 из раздела «Съемка (Smart Auto)» (=33).

zzДля большей выразительности видеоподборок перед съемкой фотографий держите камеру наведенной на объект около четырех секунд.

3 Произведите съемку.

zzДля съемки фотографии выполните шаг 4 из раздела «Съемка (Smart Auto)» (=33).

zzКамера записывает как фотографию, так и видеоклип. Клип, который завершается

фотографией и звуком срабатывания затвора, образует одну главу в видеоподборке.

●● Время работы от аккумулятора в этом режиме меньше, чем в режиме [], так как для каждого кадра снимается клип видеоподборки.

●● Клип видеоподборки может не записываться при съемке фотографии сразу же после включения камеры, выбора режима [] или управления камерой другими способами.

●● Звуки и вибрация, вызываемые работой с камерой, записываются в видео­ подборках.

●● Для качества изображения видеоподборки автоматически устанавливается значение [] для NTSC и [] для PAL, изменить это значение невозможно (=160).

●● При нажатии наполовину кнопки спуска затвора или при срабатывании таймера автоспуска звуковые сигналы не воспроизводятся (=164).

●● В указанных ниже случаях клипы видеоподборки записываются как отдель­ ные файлы видеофильмов, даже если они были сняты в один и тот же день в режиме [].

Размер файла видеоподборки достигает прибл. 4 Гбайт или общее время съемки достигает прибл. 16 мин и 40 с.

Видеоподборка защищена от стирания (=113).

Изменены настройки летнего времени (=20) или часового пояса (=162).

Создается новая папка (=159).

●● Изменение или удаление записанных звуков срабатывания затвора невозможно.

●● Если вы предпочитаете записывать видеоподборки без фотографий, произ­ ведите такую настройку заранее. Выберите MENU (=29) ► вкладку [7] ► [Тип подборки] ► [Без фото].

●● Отдельные главы можно редактировать (=126).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

35

Запуск воспроизведения видеоподборки

Для воспроизведения видеоподборки за определенный день выведите на экран фотографию, снятую в режиме [], или укажите дату, для которой требуется воспроизвести видеоподборку (=106).

Фотографии/видеофильмы

●● Если камера не подает звуковые сигналы операций, возможно, что при ее включении удерживалась нажатой кнопка []. Чтобы включить звуковые сигналы, нажмите кнопку [], выберите пункт [Тихо] на вкладке [3], затем выберите значение [Откл.].

Фотографии

●● Мигающий значок [] предупреждает о повышенной вероятности смазывания изображения из-за сотрясения камеры. В таком случае установите камеру на штатив или примите другие меры для обеспечения ее неподвижности.

●● Если снимки получаются темными несмотря на срабатывание вспышки, подойдите ближе к объекту. Подробные сведения о радиусе действия вспышки см. в разделе «Камера» (= 204).

●● Если при нажатии наполовину кнопки спуска затвора камера подает только один звуковой сигнал, это может означать, что объект находится слишком близко. Подробные сведения о диапазоне фокусировки (диапазоне съемки) см. в разделе «Диапазон съемки» (= 205).

●● Для уменьшения эффекта «красных глаз» и для помощи в фокусировке при съемке в местах с недостаточной освещенностью может загораться лампа.

●● Значок [], мигающий при попытке съемки, означает, что съемка невозможна, пока не завершится зарядка вспышки. Съемка может возобновиться сразу после того, как будет готова вспышка, поэтому либо полностью нажмите кнопку спуска затвора и подождите, либо отпустите кнопку и снова нажмите ее.

●● Если отображается значок «Спит» или «Спящие малыши» (=37), звук срабатывания затвора не воспроизводится.

●● Хотя следующий кадр можно снимать еще до появления экрана съемки, используемая фокусировка, яркость и цвета могут определяться преды­ дущим кадром.

●● Длительность отображения изображений после съемки можно изменить (=54).

Видеофильмы

●● Перед видеосъемкой опустите вспышку пальцем. Во время съемки следите, чтобы не закрыть микрофон (1) пальцем. Если оставить вспышку поднятой или перекрыть микрофон, это может помешать записи звука или привести к приглушенной записи звука.

(1)

●● Во время съемки видеофильмов не касайтесь никаких органов управления камерой, кроме кнопки видеосъемки, так как издаваемые камерой звуки записываются.

●● После начала видеосъемки область изображения изменяется и объекты увеличиваются для обеспечения возможности коррекции значительных сотрясений камеры. Чтобы снимать объекты с тем же размером, с которым они отображаются до начала съемки, задайте для параметра «Динамич. IS» значение [Низкий] (=52).

●● Звук записывается в стереорежиме.

●● Можно уменьшить искажения звука, возникающие при съемке на сильном ветру. Однако в случае использования этой функции при отсутствии ветра записи могут звучать неестественно. Если ветер слабый, выберите MENU (=29) ► вкладку [7] ► [Фильтр шумов] ► [Откл.] (=70).

●● Во время видеосъемки может также записывать звук работы системы авто­ фокусировки объектива.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

36

Значки сюжетов

 Фотографии 

 Видеофильмы

В режимах [

] и [

] определенные камерой снимаемые сюжеты обозначаются

значком, и автоматически выбираются соответствующие настройки для обеспечения

оптимальной фокусировки, яркости объекта и цвета. В зависимости от сюжетов может

производиться серийная съемка (=38).

Фон

Объект

Контровой

Нормальный

Темный*1

Закаты

Прожекторы

свет

Люди

*2

*3

Движущиеся

*3

*3

люди

Тени на лице

*2

Улыбается

*3

*3

Спит

*2

*3

Малыши

*3

*3

Улыбающиеся

*3

*3

малыши

Спящие малыши

*2

*3

Движущиеся

*3

*3

дети

Прочие объекты

*2

*3

Прочие движу­

*3

*3

щиеся объекты

Прочие близкие

*2

*3

объекты

*1

Со штативом.

*2 Фон значков имеет светло-синий цвет, если на заднем плане находится синее небо, темно-

синий цвет, если задний план темный, и серый цвет для всех остальных задних планов.

*3 Фон значков имеет светло-синий цвет, если на заднем плане находится синее небо, и серый

цвет для всех остальных задних планов.

●● У значков [], [], [], [] и [] фоновый цвет темно-синий, у значка [] фоновый цвет оранжевый.

●● В случае видеофильмов отображаются только значки «Люди», «Прочие объекты» и «Прочие близкие объекты».

●● В режиме [] отображаются только значки «Люди», «Тени на лице», «Прочие объекты» и «Прочие близкие объекты».

●● При съемке с автоспуском значки не отображаются для следующих объектов: движущиеся, улыбающиеся или спящие люди; улыбающиеся или спящие малыши; движущиеся дети; и прочие движущиеся объекты.

●● Значки улыбающихся или спящих объектов съемки и движущихся детей не отобра­ жаются в режимах работы затвора, отличных от [] (=38, =42), а также когда для параметра [Корр. рт. лампы] задано значение [Вкл.] и выполняется автоматическая коррекция эпизодов (=48).

●● Если для вспышки установлен режим [], значки с обратной засветкой для движущихся детей и улыбающихся людей не отображаются.

●● Значки малышей (включая улыбающихся и спящих) и движущихся детей отобра­ жаются, если для параметра [Идентиф. лица] задано значение [Вкл.] и обнаружены лица зарегистрированных малышей (не старше 2 лет) или детей (2 – 12 лет)

(=44). Заранее убедитесь в правильности даты и времени (=20).

●● Если значок не соответствует фактическим условиям съемки или если съемка с ожидаемым эффектом, цветом или яркостью невозможна, попробуйте произвести съемку в режиме [] (=73).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

37

Эпизоды, для которых производится серийная съемка

Если во время съемки фотографии отображается значок одного из приведенных ниже (в левом столбце таблице) эпизодов, камера производит серийную съемку. Если при наполовину нажатой кнопке спуска затвора отображается значок одного из приве­ денных ниже (в левом столбце таблице) эпизодов, появляется один из значков [], [] или [], показывающий, что камера производит серийную съемку.

Улыбается

Снимаются последовательные изображения, и камера

(включая «Малыши»)

анализирует такие детали, как выражение лиц, чтобы

сохранить изображение, определенное как наилучшее.

Превосходные кадры спящих лиц, полученные за счет

Спит

сочетания последовательных кадров для снижения

сотрясения камеры и уменьшения шумов изображения.

(включая «Малыши»)

Подсветка автофокусировки не включается, вспышка

не срабатывает и звук срабатывания затвора не воспро­

изводится.

Дети

Чтобы не упустить удачный кадр бегающих вокруг детей,

камера снимает три последовательных кадра при каждой

съемке.

●● В некоторых эпизодах ожидаемые изображения могут быть не сохранены, а изображения могут выглядеть иначе, чем ожидалось.

●● Фокусировка, яркость изображения и цвет определяются для первого кадра.

●● Если требуется снимать только одиночные изображения, нажмите [], выберите в меню значок [], затем выберите значок [].

Значки стабилизации изображения

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

Автоматически применяется стабилизация изображения, оптимальная для условий съемки (интеллектуальная стабилизация изображения), и отображаются следующие значки.

Стабилизация изображения для фотографий (нормальная).

Стабилизация изображения для фотографий при панорамировании (панорамирование)*.

Стабилизация изображения по углу поворота и смещению при макро­ съемке (гибридная стабилизация изображения).

Для видеофильмов отображается значок [] и также применяется стабилизация изображения [].

Стабилизация изображения для видеофильмов, уменьшающая сильные сотрясения камеры, возникающие, например, во время ходьбы (динамическая).

Стабилизация изображения для медленных сотрясений камеры, например при съемке видеофильмов в диапазоне телефото (усиленная).

Стабилизация изображения не используется, так как камера установлена на штатив или удерживается неподвижно другими способами. Однако во время видеосъемки отображается значок [] и система стабилизации используется для исключения вибрации, вызываемой ветром и другими источниками (штативная стабилизация изображения).

*Отображается при панорамировании, когда камера поворачивается вслед за движущимися объектами. Когда камера следует за объектами по горизонтали, стабилизация изображения компенсирует только вертикальные сотрясения камеры, а горизонтальная стабилизация прекращается. Аналогично, когда камера следует за объектами по вертикали, стабилизация изображения компенсирует только горизонтальные сотрясения камеры.

●● Для отмены стабилизации изображения установите для параметра [Режим IS] значение [Откл.] (=52). В таком случае значок стабилизации изображения не отображается.

●● В режиме [] значок [] не отображается.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

38

Рамки на экране

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

В режиме [], когда камера обнаруживает объекты, на которые она направлена, на экране отображаются различные рамки.

●● Вокруг объекта (или лица человека), выбранного камерой в качестве главного объекта, отображается белая рамка, вокруг остальных обнаруженных лиц отобра­ жаются серые рамки. Рамки в определенных пределах следуют за движущимися объектами, чтобы эти объекты оставались в фокусе. Однако если камера обнару­ живает перемещение объекта, на экране остается только белая рамка.

●● Если при наполовину нажатой кнопке спуска затвора камера обнаруживает перемещение объекта, отображается синяя рамка и производится постоянная настройка фокусировки и яркости изображения (Следящая AF).

●● Если рамки отсутствуют, не отображаются вокруг требуемых объектов или отображаются на заднем плане или аналогичных областях, попробуйте произвести съемку в режиме [] (=73).

●● Чтобы выбрать объект, на который требуется сфокусироваться, нажмите этот объект на экране. Отображается значок [], и камера переходит в режим тактильной автофокусировки (=86). При наполовину нажатой кнопке спуска затвора отображается синяя рамка, и камера поддерживает фокусировку­ на объект и настройку яркости изображения (Следящая AF).

Часто используемые удобные функции

Дополнительное увеличение объектов (Цифровой зум)

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

Если расстояние до удаленных объектов слишком велико для увеличения с помощью оптического зума, используйте цифровой зум с максимальным 12-кратным увеличением.

1 Переместите рычаг зумирования в направлении [].

zzУдерживайте рычаг нажатым до тех пор, пока

зумирование не остановится.

zzЗумирование останавливается при достижении максимального коэффициента зумирования, при котором зернистость изображения еще незаметна; и этот коэффициент отображается на экране.

(1)

2 Снова переместите рычаг зумирования

в направлении [ ].

zzКамера производит дальнейшее увеличение объекта.

zz(1) — это текущий коэффициент зумирования.

●● При перемещении рычага зумирования отображается шкала зумирования (на которой отображается позиция зумирования). Цвета на шкале зумиро­ вания обозначают разные диапазоны зумирования.

Белый диапазон: диапазон оптического зумирования, в котором на изобра­ жении отсутствует зернистость.

Желтый диапазон: диапазон цифрового зумирования, в котором на изобра­ жении отсутствует заметная зернистость (ZoomPlus).

Синий диапазон: диапазон цифрового зумирования, в котором на изобра­ жении заметна зернистость.

●● Так как при некоторых значениях разрешения синий диапазон не доступен (=90), максимальный коэффициент зумирования может быть достигнут в соответствии с инструкциями шага 1.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

39

●● Чтобы отключить цифровой зум, выберите MENU (=29) ► вкладку [2] ► [Цифровой зум] ► [Откл.].

Съемка с заранее установленными фокусными расстояниями (Пошаговый зум)

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

Снимайте с часто используемыми значениями фокусного расстояния в диапазоне 28 – 84 мм (в пересчете на 35-миллиметровый эквивалент).

zzЧтобы изменить фокусное расстояние с 28 на 35 мм, поверните кольцо [] против часовой стрелки до щелчка. Поворачивайте кольцо [] против часовой стрелки для увеличения изображения или по часовой стрелке для его уменьшения.

●● При съемке видеофильмов пошаговый зум недоступен, даже если повора­­ чивать кольцо [].

●● При использовании цифрового зума (=39) коэффициент зумирования нельзя настраивать, поворачивая кольцо [] против часовой стрелки. Однако можно установить фокусное расстояние 84 мм, повернув кольцо по часовой стрелке.

Использование таймера автоспуска

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

С помощью таймера автоспуска фотограф может включить себя в групповую фото­ графию или делать другие снимки с задержкой. Камера производит съемку прибли­ зительно через 10 с после нажатия кнопки спуска затвора.

1 Выполните настройку.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите значок [] в меню, затем выберите [] (=28).

zzПосле завершения настройки отображается значок [].

2 Произведите съемку.

zzДля фотографий: нажмите наполовину кнопку спуска затвора для фокусировки на объект, затем нажмите эту кнопку полностью.

zzДля видеофильмов: нажмите кнопку видеосъемки.

zzПосле запуска таймера автоспуска начинает мигать соответствующая лампа, и камера воспро­ изводит звук таймера автоспуска.

zzЗа 2 с до съемки мигание и звуковая сигнали­ зация ускоряются. (Если должна сработать вспышка, лампа остается гореть, не мигая.)

zzДля отмены съемки после запуска таймера автоспуска нажмите кнопку [].

zzДля восстановления исходной настройки выбе­ рите на шаге 1 значок [].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

40

●● Можно также отменить съемку после начала отсчета, нажав на экран.

Использование таймера автоспуска для исключения сотрясения камеры

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

В этом варианте спуск затвора производится приблизительно через 2 с после нажатия кнопки спуска затвора. Если при нажатии кнопки спуска затвора возникают сотрясения камеры, они не повлияют на снимок.

zzВыполните шаг 1 из раздела «Использование таймера автоспуска» (=40) и выберите значок [].

zzПосле завершения настройки отображается значок [].

zzДля съемки выполните шаг 2 из раздела «Использование таймера автоспуска» (=40).

Настройка таймера автоспуска

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

Можно задать задержку спуска (0 – 30 с) и количество снимков (1 – 10 снимков).

1 Выберите значок [].

zzВ соответствии с инструкциями шага 1 раздела «Использование таймера автоспуска» (=40) выберите значок [] и нажмите кнопку [].

2 Выполните настройку.

zzКоснитесь времени задержки или количества снимков, чтобы выбрать один из этих параметров.

zzНажимая [][], выберите значение, затем дважды нажмите кнопку [].

zzПосле завершения настройки отображается значок [].

zzДля съемки выполните шаг 2 из раздела «Использование таймера автоспуска» (=40).

●● Для видеофильмов, снимаемых с использованием таймера автоспуска, съемка начинается с указанной задержкой, но заданное количество снимков не учитывается.

●● Если задано несколько кадров, яркость изображения и баланс белого опреде­­ ляются для первого кадра. Необходимое время между кадрами увеличива­­ ется, если срабатывает вспышка или если задана съемка большого количества кадров. При полном заполнении карты памяти съемка автоматически останавливается.

●● Если указана задержка больше 2 с, за 2 с до съемки частота мигания лампы и подачи звуковых сигналов увеличивается. (Если должна сработать вспышка, лампа остается гореть, не мигая.)

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

41

Съемка путем нажатия на экран (Съемка при касании)

 Фотографии  Видеофильмы

Эта функция позволяет снимать, не используя кнопку спуска затвора, а просто нажимая на экран и отпуская палец. Камера автоматически фокусируется на объекты и настра­ ивает яркость изображения.

1 Включите функцию съемки при касании. zzНажмите значок [] и измените его на [].

2 Произведите съемку.

zzДля съемки коснитесь объекта на экране.

zzКамера производит съемку, и воспроизводится звук срабатывания затвора.

zzДля отмены съемки при касании выберите значок [] на шаге 1.

●● Даже когда на экране отображается снимок, можно подготовиться к съемке следующего кадра, нажав [].

●● Настройки съемки при касании можно также задать, выбрав меню MENU (=29) ►вкладку [2] ►[Съем. при кас.]. Чтобы скрыть значок настройки съемки при касании, задайте для параметра [Знач.съем.при касан.] значение [Откл.].

Серийная съемка

 Фотографии  Видеофильмы

В режиме [] для серийной съемки полностью нажмите кнопку спуска затвора и удерживайте ее нажатой.

Подробные сведения о скорости серийной съемки см. в разделе «Камера» (= 204).

1 Выполните настройку.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите значок [] в меню, затем выберите [] (=28).

zzПосле завершения настройки отображается значок [].

2 Произведите съемку.

zzДля серийной съемки полностью нажмите кнопку спуска затвора и удерживайте ее нажатой.

●● Во время серийной съемки фокусировка, экспозиция и цвета фиксируются в положении/на уровне, определенном при наполовину нажатой кнопке спуска затвора.

●● Не может использоваться с таймером автоспуска (=40).

●● Съемка может на короткое время останавливаться или скорость серийной съемки может снижаться в зависимости от условий съемки, параметров камеры и положения зумирования.

●● По мере увеличения количества снятых кадров скорость съемки может уменьшаться.

●● При срабатывании вспышки скорость съемки может снижаться.

●● Многозонный баланс белого (=33) недоступен. Также обратите внимание, что недоступны указанные ниже функции.

[Корр. рт. лампы] (=48) [Обн. моргания] (=51)

●● В режиме съемки при касании (=42) камера производит серийную съемку, пока вы касаетесь экрана. Фокусировка и экспозиция во время серийной съемки определяются для первого кадра и затем остаются постоянными.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

42

Отображение изображений во время воспроизведения

Каждый набор изображений, снятых в режиме серийной съемки, рассматривается как единая группа, и отображается только первое изображение из этой группы. Для обозначения того, что изображение входит в группу, в левом верхнем углу экрана отображается значок [].

●● При удалении сгруппированного изображения (=115) также удаляются все изображения из этой группы. Будьте внимательны при удалении изображений.

●● Сгруппированные изображения можно воспроизводить индивидуально (=110) и в разгруппированном виде (=110).

●● При установке защиты (=113) сгруппированного изображения защищаются все изображения в группе.

●● Сгруппированные изображения можно просматривать индивидуально при воспроизведении с помощью функции поиска изображений (=107). В этом случае изображения временно разгруппировываются.

●● Для сгруппированных изображений недоступны следующие действия: редакти­ рование информации функции идентификации лица (=111), увеличение (=112), пометка как избранных (=118), редактирование (=121), печать (=175), настройка печати отдельных изображений (=179)

и добавление в фотокнигу (=181). Для выполнения этих операций либо просматривайте сгруппированные изображения индивидуально (=110), либо сначала отмените группирование (=110).

Использование функции идентификации лица

Если заранее зарегистрировать человека, камера будет обнаруживать его лицо и во время съемки отдавать ему приоритет при выборе фокусировки, яркости и цвета.

В режиме [] камера может обнаруживать малышей и детей на основе зарегис­ трированных дат рождения и во время съемки оптимизировать для них настройки. Эта функция также позволяет искать снятые изображения, на которых присутствуют зарегистрированные люди (=108).

Личные сведения

●● В камере сохраняются такие сведения, как изображение лица (информация о лице), зарегистрированное с помощью функции идентификации лица, и личные сведения (имя, дата рождения). Кроме того, при обнаружении зарегистрированных людей их имена записываются в фотографиях. При использовании функции идентифи­ кации лица будьте осторожны, отдавая камеру или изображения другим лицам, а также при размещении изображений в Интернете, где их могут просматривать многие другие люди.

●● При утилизации камеры или передаче ее другому лицу после использования функции идентификации лица обязательно удалите из камеры всю информацию (зарегистрированные лица, имена и даты рождения) (=47).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

43

Регистрация информации функции идентификации лица

Для использования с функцией идентификации лица можно зарегистрировать инфор­ мацию (информация о лице, имена и даты рождения) максимум для 12 человек.

1 Откройте экран настройки.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите пункт [Парам. идентификатора лица] на вкладке [2], затем нажмите кнопку [] (=29).

zzНажмите пункт [Добавить], чтобы выбрать его, затем нажмите кнопку [].

zzВыберите пункт [Добавить новое лицо] и нажмите кнопку [].

2 Зарегистрируйте информацию о лице.

zzНаправьте камеру таким образом, чтобы лицо человека, которого требуется зарегистрировать, находилось в серой рамке в центре экрана.

zzБелая рамка на лице человека означает, что лицо распознано. Убедитесь, что на лице появилась белая рамка, затем произведите съемку.

zzЕсли лицо не распознано, регистрация инфор­ мации о лице невозможна.

zzПосле появления запроса [Регистрировать?] нажмите [OK].

zzОтображается экран [Ред. профиль].

3 Зарегистрируйте имя и дату рождения человека.

zzНажмите текстовое поле имени для открытия клавиатуры, затем введите имя (=30).

zzДля регистрации даты рождения на экране [Ред. профиль] нажмите текстовое поле дня рождения.

zzНажмите вариант, чтобы выбрать его. zzДля задания даты нажимайте [][]. zzПосле завершения нажмите кнопку [].

4 Сохраните настройки. zzНажмите [Сохранить].

zzПосле отображения сообщения нажмите [Да].

5 Продолжите регистрацию информации о лице.

zzЧтобы зарегистрировать еще до 4 экземпляров информации о лице (с разными выражениями лица или углами съемки), повторите шаг 2.

zzЗарегистрированные лица легче распознаются, если добавлена различная информация о лице. Помимо изображения анфас, добавьте изобра­ жение под небольшим углом сбоку, снимок улыбающегося лица, а также снимки в помещении и на улице.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

44

●● При выполнении шага 2 вспышка не срабатывает.

●● Если на шаге 3 не была зарегистрирована дата рождения, значки «Малыши»

и «Дети» (=37) в режиме [

] не отображаются.

●● Можно перезаписать зарегистрированную информацию о лице или добавить информацию о лице позже, если не все 5 позиций информации о лице заняты (=44).

Съемка

Если заранее зарегистрировать человека, камера будет приоритетно выбирать его

вкачестве главного объекта и во время съемки оптимизировать фокусировку, яркость

ицвета для этого человека.

zzКогда камера направлена на людей, отобража­­ ются имена максимум 3 зарегистрированных человек, если они обнаружены.

zzПроизведите съемку.

zzОтображаемые имена записываются в фото­ графиях. Имена обнаруженных людей (не более 5 человек) записываются, даже если они не отображаются.

●● Возможно ошибочное определение других людей, отличных от зарегистри­ рованных, если их лица имеют похожие черты.

●● Зарегистрированные люди могут неправильно определяться, если снимаемое изображение или эпизод существенно отличаются от зарегистрированной информации о лице.

●● Если зарегистрированное лицо не определяется или плохо определяется, запишите вместо зарегистрированной информации новую информацию о лице. Регистрация информации о лице непосредственно перед съемкой упрощает определение зарегистрированных лиц.

●● Если человек ошибочно определен как другой человек, но съемка была продолжена, записанное в изображении имя можно отредактировать или удалить во время воспроизведения (=111).

●● Так как лица малышей и детей быстро изменяются по мере роста, необходимо регулярно обновлять информацию об их лицах (=44).

●● Имена остаются записанными в изображениях, даже если снять описанный в разделе «Настройка отображаемой информации» (= 99) флажок [Инф.о съемке] для отключения отображения имен.

●● Если не требуется записывать имена в изображениях, выберите пункт [Парам. идентификатора лица] на вкладке [2], выберите пункт [Идентиф. лица], затем выберите значение [Откл.].

●● Имена, записанные в изображении, можно проверять на экране воспроиз­ ведения (режим простой информации) (=105).

●● В режиме [] имена не отображаются на экране съемки, но записываются на фотографиях.

●● Имена, записанные при серийной съемке (=42), записываются в том же положении, что и на первом кадре, даже если объекты перемещаются.

Проверка и редактирование зарегистрированной информации

1 Откройте экран [Проверить/ред.].

zzВ соответствии с шагом 1 раздела «Регистрация информации функции идентификации лица» (=44) выберите [Проверить/ред.].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

45

2 Выберите человека для проверки или редактирования информации о нем.

zzНажмите изображение человека, инфор­ мацию о котором требуется проверить или отредактировать.

3 Проверьте или требуемым образом отредактируйте информацию.

zzЧтобы проверить имя или дату рождения, нажмите [Ред. профиль]. На открывшемся экране можно изменить имя или дату рождения, как описано в шаге 3 раздела «Регистрация информации функции идентификации лица» (=44).

zzЧтобы проверить информацию о лице, нажмите [Инф. о лицах]. Чтобы удалить информацию о лице, нажмите [Стереть] на отображаемом экране, затем нажмите информацию о лице, которую требуется удалить. После появления запроса [Стереть?] нажмите [OK].

●● Даже если изменить имена в пункте [Ред. профиль], имена, записанные в ранее снятых фотографиях, не изменяются.

Перезапись и добавление информации о лице

Вместо существующей информации о лице можно записать новую информацию. Информацию о лице следует регулярно обновлять, особенно в случае малышей и детей, так как их лица быстро изменяются по мере роста.

Можно также добавлять информацию о лице, если заняты не все 5 позиций инфор­ мации о лице.

1 Откройте экран [Добавить инф. о лице].

zzВ соответствии с шагом 1 раздела «Регистрация информации функции идентификации лица» (=44) выберите [Добавить инф. о лице].

2 Выберите человека, информацию о лице которого требуется перезаписать.

zzНажмите имя человека, для которого требуется перезаписать информацию о лице.

zzЕсли уже зарегистрированы пять вариантов информации о лице, отображается сообщение. Нажмите [OK].

zzЕсли зарегистрировано менее пяти вариантов информации о лице, переходите к шагу 4 для добавления варианта.

3 Выберите информацию о лице, которую требуется перезаписать.

zzНажмите информацию о лице, которую требуется перезаписать.

4 Зарегистрируйте информацию о лице.

zzПроизведите съемку в соответствии с шагом 2 раздела «Регистрация информации функции идентификации лица» (=44), затем зарегис­­ трируйте новую информацию о лице.

zzЗарегистрированные лица легче распознаются, если добавлена различная информация о лице. Помимо изображения анфас, добавьте изобра­ жение под небольшим углом сбоку, снимок улыбающегося лица, а также снимки в помещении­ и на улице.

●● Если все 5 позиций информации заполнены, добавление информации о лице невозможно. Выполните приведенные выше шаги для перезаписи информации о лице.

●● Если имеется по крайней мере одна свободная позиция, с помощью приве­ денных выше шагов можно добавить новую информацию о лице, но перезапись информации о лице невозможна. Вместо перезаписи информации о лице сначала удалите ненужную существующую информацию (=45), затем зарегистрируйте требуемую новую информацию о лице (=44).

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

46

Удаление зарегистрированной информации

Можно удалить информацию (информация о лице, имена и даты рождения), зарегис­ трированную в функции идентификации лиц. Однако имена, записанные в ранее снятых изображениях, не удаляются.

1 Откройте экран [Стереть инф.].

zzВ соответствии с инструкциями шага 1 раздела «Регистрация информации функции иденти­ фикации лица» (=44) выберите пункт [Стереть инф.].

2 Выберите человека для стирания информации о нем.

zzНажмите имя человека для удаления.

zzПосле появления запроса [Стереть?] нажмите [OK].

●● После удаления информации о зарегистрированных людях отображение их имен (=107), перезапись их информации (=111) и поиск изобра­ жений с этими людьми (=108) будут невозможны.

●● Можно также удалить имена из информации об изображении (=111).

Функции настройки изображения

Изменение формата кадра

 Фотографии  Видеофильмы

Формат кадра (отношение ширины к высоте) можно изменить в соответствии с приве­ денными ниже инструкциями.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите в меню значок

[], затем выберите требуемый вариант

(=28).

zzПосле завершения настройки будет обновлено

соотношение сторон экрана.

zzЧтобы восстановить исходную настройку, повто­ рите эту операцию, но выберите значок [].

Используется для отображения на широкоэкранных телевизорах высокой четкости или аналогичных устройствах отображения.

Собственный формат экрана камеры. Формат кадра, совпадающий с форматом 35-миллиметровой пленки и используемый для печати изображений на бумаге формата 130 × 180 мм или формата почтовой открытки.

Используется для отображения на телевизорах стандартной четкости или аналогичных устройствах отображения. Также используется для печати изображений на бумаге формата 90 × 130 мм или форматов серии A.

Квадратный формат кадра.

●● Недоступно в режиме [].

●● Эту настройку можно также задать, выбрав меню MENU (=29) ► вкладку [1] ► [Формат кадра фотографий].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

47

Изменение качества изображения

 Фотографии  Видеофильмы

Выберите одно из 4 значений качества изображения. Сведения о количестве изобра­ жений каждого типа, которые можно записать на карту памяти, см. в разделе «Количество снимков, которые можно записать на карту памяти» (= 205).

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите в меню значок [ ], затем выберите требуемый вариант (=28).

zzОтображается настроенное значение.

zzЧтобы восстановить исходную настройку, повто­ рите эту операцию, но выберите значок [ ].

Рекомендации по выбору качества изображения в зависимости от формата бумаги (для изображений 3:2)

A2 (420 × 594 мм)

A3 – A5 (297 × 420 – 148 × 210 мм)

90 × 130 мм, 130 × 180 мм, Открытка

Для отправки по электронной почте и аналогичных целей

●● Недоступно в режиме [].

●● Качество изображения можно также изменить, выбрав меню MENU (=29) ► вкладку [1] ► [Качество] (=90).

Коррекция зеленоватых оттенков областей изображения при освещении ртутными лампами

 Фотографии  Видеофильмы

В режиме [] объекты или задний план на снимках ночных сюжетов с освеще­ нием ртутными лампами могут приобретать зеленоватый оттенок. Этот зеленоватый оттенок можно автоматически исправлять при съемке, используя многозонный баланс белого.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите пункт

[Корр. рт. лампы] на вкладке [6], затем

выберите значение [Вкл.] (=29).

zzПосле завершения настройки отображается значок [].

zzЧтобы восстановить исходную настройку, повто­ рите эту операцию, но выберите значение [Откл.].

●● После завершения съемки с освещением ртутными лампами следует вернуть для параметра [Корр. рт. лампы] значение [Откл.]. В противном случае возможна ошибочная коррекция зеленых оттенков, не связанных с освеще­ нием ртутными лампами.

●● Попробуйте сначала сделать несколько тестовых снимков и проверьте, достигнут ли требуемый результат.

●● При серийной съемке (=42) для этого параметра устанавливается значение [Откл.], которое невозможно изменить.

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

48

Изменение качества видеоизображения

Фотографии Видеофильмы

Настройте качество видеоизображения (размер изображения и частоту кадров). Частота кадров указывает число кадров, записываемых каждую секунду, и определяется­ авто­ матически в зависимости от настройки NTSC или PAL (=160). Сведения об общей длительность видеозаписей, которые поместятся на карту памяти при каждом уровне качества, см. в разделе «Время записи на карту памяти» (= 206).

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите пункт меню

качества видео, затем выберите требуемый

вариант (=28).

zzОтображается настроенное значение.

Для видеосистемы NTSC

Качество

Количество

Частота

записываемых

Сведения

изображения

кадров

пикселов (разрешение)

*

1920 × 1080

59,94 кадра/с

Для съемки с разреше­

нием высокой четкости

1920

× 1080

29,97 кадра/с

]

Full HD. Режим [

обеспечивает более плав­

× 1080

1920

23,98 кадра/с

ную передачу движения.

1280

× 720

29,97 кадра/с

Для съемки с разреше­

нием высокой четкости.

640 × 480

29,97 кадра/с

Для съемки со стандарт­­

ным разрешением.

* Доступно в режиме [] или [].

Для видеосистемы PAL

Качество

Количество

Частота

записываемых

Сведения

изображения

кадров

пикселов (разрешение)

*

1920

× 1080

50,00 кадра/с

Для съемки с разреше­

нием высокой четкости

× 1080

1920

25,00 кадра/с

Full HD.

1280

× 720

25,00 кадра/с

Для съемки с разреше­

нием высокой четкости.

640 × 480

25,00 кадра/с

Для съемки со стан­

дартным разрешением.

* Доступно в режиме [] или [].

●● После многократной съемки в режиме [] или [] видео­ съемка с таким уровнем качества может стать временно невозможной (даже при нажатии кнопки видеосъемки), пока камера не остынет. Чтобы продолжить съемку в режиме [] или [], после появления сообщения с уведомлением нажмите [Да]. В противном случае перед продол­ жением съемки выключите камеру и немного подождите, пока она не остынет.

●● Черные полосы (слева и справа экрана в режимах [] и [] или вверху и внизу в режимах [], [], [], [], [], [] и []) обозначают незаписываемую область изображения.

●● Эту настройку можно также задать, выбрав меню MENU (=29) ► вкладку [8] ► [Качество видео].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

49

Полезные функции съемки

Использование электронного уровня

 Фотографии   Видеофильмы

При съемке на экране может отображаться электронный уровень, помогающий контролировать горизонтальность камеры.

1 Выведите на экран электронный уровень.

zzНажмите кнопку [], чтобы вывести на экран электронный уровень.

2 Требуемым образом выровняйте камеру по горизонтали.

zzВыровняйте камеру, чтобы центральная часть электронного уровня приобрела зеленый цвет.

●● Если на шаге 1 электронный уровень не отображается, нажмите кнопку [] и проверьте настройку на вкладке [1] ► [Отображение информации о съемке].

●● Если камера слишком сильно наклонена вперед или назад, использовать электронный уровень невозможно и он отображается серым цветом.

●● Во время съемки видеофильмов электронный уровень не отображается. ●● Если держать камеру вертикально, ориентация электронного уровня авто­

матически обновляется в соответствии с ориентацией камеры.

●● Если электронный уровень неэффективен для обеспечения горизонтальности камеры, выполните его калибровку (=161).

●● Недоступно в режиме [].

Увеличение области, на которую произведена фокусировка

 Фотографии  Видеофильмы

Фокусировку можно проверить, наполовину нажав кнопку спуска затвора — при этом будет увеличена сфокусированная область изображения в рамке автофокусировки.

1 Выполните настройку.

zzНажмите кнопку [], выберите пункт [Зум точки AF] на вкладке [3], затем выбе­ рите значение [Вкл.] (=29).

2 Проверьте фокусировку.

zzНажмите наполовину кнопку спуска затвора. Лицо, определенное в качестве главного объекта, увеличивается.

zzДля восстановления исходной настройки выбе­ рите на шаге 1 значение [Откл.].

●● В указанных ниже случаях при наполовину нажатой кнопке спуска затвора область фокусировки не увеличивается.

Если лицо не обнаружено, если человек находится слишком близко к камере и его лицо не помещается на экране или если камера обнару­ живает перемещение объекта.

При использовании цифрового зума (=39) ●● Недоступно в режиме [].

Перед использованием

Основные операции

Руководство по расширенным операциям

Основные сведения о камере

Автоматический/гибридный автоматический режим

Другие режимы съемки

Режим P

Режимы Tv, Av, M и C

Режим воспроизведения

Функции Wi-Fi

Меню настройки

Принадлежности

Приложение

Алфавитный указатель

50

Loading…

  • Драйверы

    2

  • Инструкции по эксплуатации

    51

Языки:

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.59 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    15.88 MB
  • Описание:
    Фотокамера

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    14.36 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    28.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(11 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    734.14 KB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.53 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.71 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Украинский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.85 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Словацкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.93 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.73 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.74 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.84 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    53.89 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    28.44 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    26.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    30.13 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    30.28 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    51.58 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.64 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.85 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Персидский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    21.02 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    18.75 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19.31 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Польский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19.2 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19.07 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    15.96 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19.66 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19.09 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(210 страниц)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    19.06 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Украинский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.92 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.12 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.35 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Литовский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.72 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Латышский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.69 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.8 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.62 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.03 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    30.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    28.41 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    33.13 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.48 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.87 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon PowerShot G9 X инструкция по эксплуатации
(11 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.03 MB
  • Описание:
    This file is an electronic guide (PDF file) for the PowerShot G9 X.

Просмотр

На NoDevice можно скачать инструкцию по эксплуатации для Canon PowerShot G9 X. Руководство пользователя необходимо для ознакомления с правилами установки и эксплуатации Canon PowerShot G9 X. Инструкции по использованию помогут правильно настроить Canon PowerShot G9 X, исправить ошибки и выявить неполадки.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Инструкция к фотоаппарату canon eos 300
  • Инструкция к фотоаппарату canon eos 1100d на русском
  • Инструкция к фотоаппарату canon ds126291
  • Инструкция к фотоаппарату canon 550d на русском
  • Инструкция к фотоаппарату canon 5d mark ii